You are on page 1of 422

WEB EDITION

OWNER'S MANUAL
DEAR VOLVO OWNER
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we
pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been recommend that you familiarise yourself with the
designed for the safety and comfort of you and equipment, instructions and maintenance infor-
your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in mation contained in this owner's manual.
the world. Your Volvo has also been designed to
satisfy all current safety and environmental
requirements.
Table of contents

01 Introduction 02 Safety
Owner's Manual in the car's screen......... 13 General information on seatbelts.............. 26 Pedestrian airbag...................................... 43
Reading the owner's manual.................... 13 Seatbelt - putting on................................. 27 Pedestrian airbag - moving the car........... 44
Digital owner's manual in the car.............. 16 Seatbelt - loosening.................................. 28 Pedestrian airbag - folding up.................. 44
Recording data......................................... 18 Seatbelt - pregnancy................................ 28 General information on child safety.......... 45

01 02 02
Accessories and extra equipment............ 19 Seatbelt reminder...................................... 29 Child seats................................................ 46
Support and information about the car on Seatbelt tensioner..................................... 29 Child seats - location................................ 50
the Internet................................................ 20 Safety - warning symbol........................... 30 Child seat - ISOFIX................................... 51
Volvo ID..................................................... 21 Airbag system........................................... 31 ISOFIX - size classes................................ 51
Environmental philosophy......................... 22 Airbags on driver's side............................ 32 ISOFIX - types of child seat...................... 52
The owner's manual and the environ- Passenger airbag...................................... 32 Child seats - upper mounting points........ 54
ment.......................................................... 24
Passenger airbag - activating/deactivat-
Laminated glass........................................ 24 ing*............................................................ 34
Side airbag (SIPS)..................................... 36
Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster
cushion..................................................... 37
Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................ 37
General information on WHIPS (whiplash
protection)................................................. 38
WHIPS - child seats.................................. 39
WHIPS - seating position.......................... 39
When the systems deploy......................... 40
General information on safety mode......... 41
Safety mode - attempting to start the
car............................................................. 42
Safety mode - moving the car.................. 43

2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


Table of contents

03 Instruments and controls


Instruments and controls, left-hand drive Seats, rear................................................. 81 Glass roof*.............................................. 104
car - overview........................................... 56 Steering wheel.......................................... 83 Compass*............................................... 105
Instruments and controls, right-hand Light switches........................................... 84 Menu navigation - combined instrument
drive car - overview................................... 59 panel....................................................... 106
Position/parking lamps............................. 86
Combined instrument panel...................... 62

03 03 03
Daytime running lights.............................. 86 Menu overview - analogue combined
Analogue combined instrument panel - instrument panel..................................... 107
overview.................................................... 62 Tunnel detection*...................................... 87
Menu overview - digital combined instru-
Digital combined instrument panel - Main/dipped beam.................................... 87 ment panel.............................................. 107
overview.................................................... 63 Active main beam*.................................... 88 Messages................................................ 107
Eco guide & Power guide*........................ 66 Active Xenon headlamps*......................... 90 Messages - handling............................... 108
Combined instrument panel - meaning of Rear fog lamp........................................... 90 MY CAR.................................................. 109
indicator symbols...................................... 67
Brake lights............................................... 91 Trip computer......................................... 110
Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols................................... 69 Hazard warning flashers........................... 91 Trip computer - analogue combined
direction indicators................................... 92 instrument panel..................................... 111
Outside temperature gauge...................... 71
Interior lighting.......................................... 93 Trip computer - digital combined instru-
Trip meter.................................................. 71 ment panel.............................................. 115
Clock......................................................... 71 Home safe light duration........................... 94
Trip computer - supplementary informa-
Combined instrument panel - license Approach light duration............................ 94 tion.......................................................... 119
agreement................................................. 72 Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pat- Trip computer - trip statistics*................ 120
Symbols in the display.............................. 73 tern............................................................ 95
Volvo Sensus............................................ 75 Wipers and washers................................. 98
Key positions............................................ 76 Power windows....................................... 100
Key positions - functions at different lev- Door mirrors............................................ 102
els.............................................................. 77 Windows and rearview and door mirrors
Seats, front................................................ 78 - heating.................................................. 103
Seats, front - electrically operated............ 80 Rearview mirror - interior........................ 104

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3


Table of contents

04 Climate control 05 Loading and storage


General information on climate control... 122 Air distribution - table............................. 135 Storage spaces....................................... 144
Actual temperature................................. 123 Engine block heater and passenger com- Storage compartment driver’s side........ 146
Sensors - climate control........................ 123 partment heater*..................................... 137 Tunnel console........................................ 146
Air quality................................................ 123 Engine block heater and passenger com- Tunnel console - armrest........................ 146
partment heater* - direct start................ 138

04 04 05
Air quality - passenger compartment fil- Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and
ter............................................................ 124 Engine block heater and passenger com- ashtray*................................................... 147
partment heater* - immediate stop......... 139
Air quality - Clean Zone Interior Package Glovebox................................................. 147
(CZIP)*..................................................... 124 Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - timer.......................... 139 Glovebox - cooling*................................ 147
Air quality - IAQS*................................... 125 Inlay mats*.............................................. 148
Engine block heater and passenger com-
Air quality - material................................ 125 partment heater* - messages................. 140 Vanity mirror............................................ 148
Menu settings - climate control.............. 125 Additional heater*.................................... 141 Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets............... 148
Air distribution in the passenger com- Fuel-driven additional heater*................. 141 Loading................................................... 149
partment.................................................. 126
Electric additional heater*....................... 142 Loading - long load................................. 150
Electronic climate control - ECC*........... 128
Roof load................................................. 150
Electronic temperature control - ETC..... 129
Load retaining eyelets............................. 151
Heated front seats*................................. 130
Loading - bag holder ............................. 151
Heated rear seat*.................................... 130
Loading - folding bag holder*................. 151
Fan.......................................................... 131
12 V socket - cargo area......................... 152
Auto-regulation....................................... 131
Cargo net................................................ 153
Temperature control in the passenger
compartment.......................................... 132 Hat shelf.................................................. 155
Air conditioning....................................... 132
Demisting and defrosting the wind-
screen..................................................... 133
Air distribution - recirculation.................. 134

4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


Table of contents

06 Locks and alarm


Remote control key................................. 157 Keyless Drive* - interference to remote Reduced alarm level............................... 181
Remote control key - losing ................... 157 control key function................................ 168 Type approval - remote control key sys-
Remote control key - personalisation*.... 158 Keyless Drive* - locking.......................... 169 tem.......................................................... 182
Locking/unlocking - indicator................. 159 Keyless Drive* - unlocking...................... 169

06 06 06
Lock indicator......................................... 159 Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key
blade....................................................... 170
Remote control key - electronic immobi-
liser.......................................................... 160 Keyless Drive* - lock settings................. 170
Remote-controlled immobiliser with Keyless Drive* - antenna location........... 171
tracking system*..................................... 160 Locking/unlocking - from the outside .... 171
Remote control key - functions............... 161 Manual locking of the door..................... 172
Remote control key - range.................... 162 Locking/unlocking - from the inside....... 173
Remote control key with PCC* - unique Total airing function................................ 174
functions................................................. 163 Locking/unlocking - glovebox................. 174
Remote control key with PCC* - range... 164 Locking/unlocking - tailgate.................... 174
Detachable key blade............................. 164 Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap........... 176
Detachable key blade - detaching/ Deadlocks*.............................................. 176
attaching................................................. 165
Child safety locks - manual activation.... 177
Detachable key blade - unlocking doors 165
Child safety locks - electrical activation* 178
Remote control key/PCC - replacing the
battery..................................................... 166 Alarm....................................................... 179
Keyless drive*.......................................... 167 Alarm indicator........................................ 180
Keyless Drive* - range............................. 167 Alarm - automatic re-arming................... 180
Keyless Drive* - secure handling of the Alarm - automatic arming....................... 180
remote control key.................................. 168 Alarm - remote control key not working. 181
Alarm signals........................................... 181

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5


Table of contents

07 Driver support
Electronic stability control (ESC) - gen- Adaptive cruise control* - overview........ 202 City Safety™ - operation........................ 218
eral.......................................................... 184 Adaptive cruise control* - managing City Safety™ - limitations....................... 219
Electronic stability control (ESC) - opera- speed...................................................... 203 City Safety™ - laser sensor.................... 221
tion.......................................................... 185 Adaptive cruise control* - set time inter- City Safety™ - symbols and messages.. 223
Electronic stability control (ESC) - sym- val............................................................ 204

07 07 07
bols and messages................................. 186 Collision warning system*....................... 224
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
Road Sign Information (RSI)................... 188 deactivation, and standby mode............ 205 Collision warning system* - function...... 225
Road sign information (RSI)* - operation 188 Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking Collision warning system* - detection of
another vehicle........................................ 206 cyclists.................................................... 226
Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations 190
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate...... 206 Collision warning system* - detection of
Speed limiter*.......................................... 190 pedestrians............................................. 227
Speed limiter* - getting started............... 191 Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue assis-
tance....................................................... 206 Collision warning system* - operation.... 228
Speed limiter* - changing speed............. 192 Collision warning system* - limitations... 229
Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise
Speed limiter - temporary deactivation control functionality................................ 208 Collision warning system* - camera sen-
and standby mode*................................. 192 sor limitations.......................................... 230
Radar sensor........................................... 209
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed excee- Collision warning system* - symbols and
ded.......................................................... 193 Radar sensor - limitations....................... 209
messages................................................ 232
Speed limiter* - deactivation................... 194 Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing
and action............................................... 211 Driver Alert System*................................ 233
Cruise control*........................................ 194 Driver Alert Control (DAC)*...................... 233
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
Cruise control* - managing speed.......... 195 messages................................................ 212 Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation... 234
Cruise control* temporary deactivation Distance Warning*.................................. 214 Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
and standby mode.................................. 196 messages................................................ 235
Distance Warning* - limitations............... 215
Cruise control* - resume set speed........ 197 Lane assistance*..................................... 236
Distance Warning* - symbols and mes-
Cruise control* - deactivate.................... 198 sages....................................................... 216 Lane Keeping Aid - function................... 236
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)*............... 199 City Safety™........................................... 217 Lane Keeping Aid - operation................. 238
Adaptive cruise control* - function......... 200 City Safety™ - function........................... 217 Lane Keeping Aid - limitations................ 238

6 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


Table of contents

08 Starting and driving


Lane Keeping Aid - symbols and mes- Alcohol lock*........................................... 261 Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual
sages....................................................... 240 Alcohol lock* - functions and operation.. 261 gearbox................................................... 282
Park Assist*............................................. 241 Alcohol lock* - storage............................ 262 Start/Stop* - settings.............................. 283
Park assist syst* - function..................... 241 Alcohol lock* - before starting the engine 262 Start/Stop* - symbols and messages..... 284

07 08 08
Park assist syst* - backward.................. 243 Alcohol lock* - to bear in mind................ 264 ECO*....................................................... 286
Park assist syst* - forward...................... 243 Alcohol lock* - symbols and messages.. 265 Foot brake............................................... 288
Park assist syst* - fault indication........... 244 Starting the engine.................................. 266 Foot brake - anti-lock braking system.... 289
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors. 244 Switching off the engine......................... 267 Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
Park assist camera.................................. 245 automatic hazard warning flashers......... 290
Steering lock........................................... 267
Park assist camera - settings................. 247 Foot brake - emergency brake assis-
Jump starting.......................................... 268 tance....................................................... 290
Park assist camera - limitations.............. 249 Gearboxes............................................... 269 Parking brake.......................................... 290
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)*........................... 249 Manual gearbox...................................... 269 Driving in water....................................... 291
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function.......... 250 Gear shift indicator*................................ 270 Overheating............................................. 292
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation........ 250 Automatic gearbox - Geartronic*............ 270 Driving with open tailgate....................... 293
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations....... 252 Automatic gearbox - Powershift*............ 274 Overload - starter battery........................ 293
Active Park Assist (PAP)* - symbols and Gear selector inhibitor............................. 276
messages................................................ 253 Before a long journey.............................. 293
Hill start assist (HSA)*............................. 277 Winter driving.......................................... 294
BLIS........................................................ 254
Start/Stop*.............................................. 277 Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing............. 294
BLIS - operation...................................... 255
Start/Stop* - function and operation....... 278 Fuel filler flap - manual opening.............. 295
CTA*........................................................ 256
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop... 279 Filling up with fuel................................... 295
BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages 258
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts........ 281 Fuel - handling........................................ 296
Adjustable steering force........................ 259
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- Fuel - petrol............................................. 296
Type approval - radar system................. 259 start......................................................... 282
Fuel - diesel............................................. 297

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 7


Table of contents

09 Wheels and tyres


Catalytic converters................................ 298 Tyres - maintenance............................... 312 Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - acti-
Filling with fuel - with a fuel can.............. 299 Tyres - direction of rotation.................... 313 vate/deactivate....................................... 328
Diesel particle filter (DPF)........................ 299 Tyres - tread wear indicators.................. 314 Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - rec-
ommendations........................................ 328
Economical driving.................................. 300 Tyres - air pressure................................. 314
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - driv-

08 09 09
Driving with a trailer................................ 301 Wheel and wheel rim dimensions........... 315 eable punctured tyres*............................ 329
Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox... 302 Tyres - dimensions.................................. 315 Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - recti-
Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox 302 Tyres - load index................................... 316 fying low tyre pressure............................ 329
Towing bracket....................................... 303 Tyres - speed ratings.............................. 316 Tyre pressure monitoring (TM)*............... 330
Detachable towbar* - storage................. 303 Wheel nuts.............................................. 317 Emergency puncture repair*................... 331
Detachable towbar* - specifications....... 304 Winter tyres............................................. 317 Emergency puncture repair kit* - loca-
tion.......................................................... 332
Detachable towbar* - attachment/ Spare wheel*........................................... 318
removal................................................... 304 Emergency puncture repair kit* - over-
Changing wheels - taking out the spare view......................................................... 333
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA.................... 307 wheel*..................................................... 319
Emergency puncture repair* - operation. 334
Towing.................................................... 308 Changing wheels - removing wheels...... 319
Emergency puncture repair* - recheck-
Towing eye.............................................. 309 Changing wheels - fitting........................ 321 ing........................................................... 336
Recovery................................................. 310 Warning triangle...................................... 323 Inflating tyres with the compressor from
Jack........................................................ 324 the emergency puncture repair kit*......... 337
First aid kit*............................................. 324 Emergency puncture repair* - returning
components to their places.................... 337
Tyre pressure monitoring*....................... 324
Emergency puncture repair kit* - sealant 338
Tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)* - general.................................... 325 Type approval - tyre pressure monitoring
(TPMS).................................................... 339
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* -
adjust (recalibration)................................ 326
Tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)* - status...................................... 327

8 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


Table of contents

10 Maintenance and service


Volvo service programme....................... 346 Lamp replacement - daytime running Cleaning the interior................................ 384
Book service and repair*......................... 346 lights....................................................... 361 Paint damage.......................................... 385
Raising the car........................................ 349 Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps...................................................... 361
Bonnet - opening and closing................. 351
Lamp replacement - direction indicators

10 10 10
Engine compartment - overview............. 351 rear, brake lights and reversing lamp..... 362
Engine compartment - checking............. 352 Lamp replacement - rear fog lamp......... 362
Engine oil - general................................. 352 Lamp replacement - vanity mirror light-
Engine oil - checking and filling.............. 353 ing........................................................... 363
Coolant - level......................................... 355 Lamps - specifications ........................... 363
Brake and clutch fluid - level.................. 356 Wiper blades........................................... 364
Climate control system - fault tracing and Washer fluid - filling................................ 366
repair....................................................... 357 Starter battery - general.......................... 367
Lamp replacement - general................... 357 Battery - symbols.................................... 369
Lamp replacement - location of front Starter battery - replacement.................. 369
lamps...................................................... 358
Battery - Start/Stop................................. 370
Lamp replacement - headlamps............. 358
Electrical system..................................... 372
Lamp replacement - cover for main/
dipped beam bulbs................................. 359 Fuses - general....................................... 372
Lamp replacement - dipped beam......... 359 Fuses - in engine compartment.............. 373
Lamp replacement - main beam............. 360 Fuses - under glovebox.......................... 376
Lamp replacement - extra main beam.... 360 Fuses - under the right-hand front seat.. 379
Lamp replacement - direction indicators Car wash................................................. 381
front......................................................... 360 Polishing and waxing.............................. 382
Lamp replacement - position/parking Water and dirt-repellent coating............. 383
lamps front.............................................. 361 Rustproofing........................................... 384

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 9


Table of contents

11 Specifications 12 Alphabetical Index


Type designations................................... 388 Alphabetical Index.................................. 408
Dimensions............................................. 390
Weights................................................... 391
Towing capacity and towball load.......... 392

11 12
Engine specifications.............................. 394
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions... 395
Engine oil - grade and volume................ 396
Coolant - grade and volume................... 398
Transmission fluid - grade and volume... 399
Brake fluid - grade and volume............... 400
Fuel tank - volume.................................. 401
Air conditioning, fluid - volume and
grade....................................................... 402
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions... 403
Tyres - approved tyre pressures............. 407

10
Table of contents

11
INTRODUCTION
01 Introduction

Owner's Manual in the car's screen Reading the owner's manual 01


NOTE
A digital version of the owner's manual is A good way of getting to know your new car
The Owner's manual is available for down-
available1 on the car's screen. The owner's is to read the owner's manual, ideally before load as a mobile application (applies for
manual provides information about how the your first journey. certain car models and mobile devices),
car works. see www.volvocars.com.
Reading the owner's manual is a good way to
For cars with owner information in the screen, become familiar with new functions, get The mobile application also includes video
advice on how best to handle the car in differ- and searchable content and easy naviga-
the printed owner's manual is a supplement
tion between different sections.
and contains important text, the latest ent situations and learn how to make the best
updates, as well as instructions that can be use of all the car's features. Please pay atten-
useful when, for practical reasons, it is not tion to the safety instructions contained in the Options/accessories
possible to read the information on the owner's manual. All types of option/accessory are marked with
screen. an asterisk*.
The specifications, design features and illus-
The owner's manual is also available on Vol- trations in this owner's manual are not bind- In addition to standard equipment, the
vo's support page and can be downloaded as ing. We reserve the right to make modifica- owner's manual also describes options (fac-
a mobile app. tions without prior notice. tory fitted equipment) and certain accessories
(retrofitted extra equipment).
Changing the display language may mean © Volvo Car Corporation
that some information does not correspond The equipment described in the owner's
to national or local laws and regulations. Owner's Manual in mobile devices manual is not available in all cars - they have
different equipment depending on adapta-
IMPORTANT tions for the needs of different markets and
national or local laws and regulations.
The driver is always responsible that the
vehicle is driven safely in traffic and that In the event of uncertainty over what is stand-
applicable laws and regulations are fol- ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo
lowed. It is also important that the car is dealer.
maintained and handled in accordance
with Volvo's recommendations in the
owner's information.
If there should be a difference between the
information on the screen and in the prin-
ted manual then it is always the printed
information that applies.

1 Applies to certain car models.


}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 13


01 Introduction
||
01 Special texts Decals Risk of property damage
The car contains different types of decal
WARNING which are designed to convey important
information in a simple and clear manner. The
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of decals in the car have the following descend-
injury.
ing degree of importance for the warning/
information.
IMPORTANT
Warning for personal injury
"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of
damage.

NOTE

G031592
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facili-
tate the use of features and functions for
example.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Footnote
Used to indicate the presence of danger
There is footnote information in the owner's
which, if the warning is ignored, may result in
manual that is located at the bottom of the
damage to property.
page. This information is an addition to the
text that it refers to via a number. If the foot- G031590
note refers to text in a table then letters are
used instead of numbers for referral. Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
white text/image on black message field.
Message texts
Used to indicate the presence of danger
In the car there are displays that show menu
which, if the warning is ignored, may result in
texts and message texts. In the owner's man-
serious personal injury or fatality.
ual the appearance of these texts differs from
the normal text. Examples of menu texts and
message texts: Media, Sending location.

14
01 Introduction

Information When there is a series of illustrations for Related information 01


step-by-step instructions each step is Related information refers to other articles
numbered in the same way as the corres- containing closely-associated information.
ponding illustration.
Images
Lists of letters appear adjacent to the ser-
The manual's images are sometimes sche-
ies of illustrations where the order of the
matic and may deviate from the car's appear-
instructions is not significant.
ance depending on equipment level and mar-
Arrows appear numbered and unnum- ket.
bered and are used to illustrate a move-
ment. To be continued
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a }} This symbol is located furthest down to
movement when the reciprocal order is of the right when an article continues on the fol-
no relevance. lowing page.
G031593 If there is no series of illustrations for step-by- Continued from previous page
step instructions then the different steps are || This symbol is located furthest up to the
White ISO symbols and white text/image on numbered with normal numbers. left when an article continues from the previ-
black message field. ous page.
Position lists
NOTE Red circles containing a number are used Related information
in overview images where different com- • The owner's manual and the environment
It is not intended that the decals illustrated ponents are pointed out. The number (p. 24)
in the owner's manual should be exact recurs in the position list featured in con-
replicas of those in the car. They are
nection with the illustration that describes
• Support and information about the car on
included to show their approximate the Internet (p. 20)
appearance and location in the car. The the item.
information that applies to your particular
car can be found on the decal on the car. Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a Example:
certain sequence are numbered in the • Coolant
owner's manual.
• Engine oil

15
01 Introduction

01 Digital owner's manual in the car • Search - Search function for finding an Search
The owner's manual can be read on the article.
screen in the car2. The content is searchable • Categories - All articles sorted into cate-
and it is easy to navigate between different gories.
sections. • Favourites - Quick access to favourite-
bookmarked articles.
Open the digital owner's manual - press the
MY CAR button in the centre console, press • Quick Guide - A selection of articles for
OK/MENU and select Owner's manual. common functions.
Select the information symbol in the lower
For basic navigation, see Operating the sys-
right-hand corner in order to obtain informa-
tem. See below for a more detailed descrip-
tion about the digital owner's manual.
tion.
NOTE Searching using the character wheel.
The digital owner's manual is not available Character list.
while driving.
Changing the input mode (see following
table).
Use the character wheel to enter a search
term, e.g. "seatbelt".
1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter, press
OK/MENU to confirm. The number and
letter buttons on the control panel in the
centre console can also be used.
Owner's manual, start page. 2. Continue with the next letter and so on.
There are four options for finding information
in the digital owner's manual:

2 Applies to certain car models.

16
01 Introduction

3. To change the input mode to numbers or Enter with the numerical keyboard The same article can be in several appropri- 01
special characters, or to perform a ate categories in order to be found more
search, turn TUNE to one of the options easily.
(see explanation in the following table) in
Turn TUNE to navigate in the category tree
the list for changing the input mode (2),
and press OK/MENU to open a category -
press OK/MENU.
selected - or article - selected . Press
EXIT to go back to the previous view.
123/AB Change between letters and
C numbers with OK/MENU. Favourites
Located here are the articles that are saved
MORE Change to special characters
as favourites. To select an article as a favour-
with OK/MENU.
ite, see the heading "Navigating in an article"
OK Perform the search. Turn TUNE below.
Numerical keyboard.
to select a search result article, Turn TUNE to navigate in the favourite list
press OK/MENU to go to the Another way of entering characters is to use and press OK/MENU to open an article.
article. the centre console's buttons 0-9, * and #. Press EXIT to go back to the previous view.
a|A Changes between lowercase When e.g. 9 is pressed, a bar appears with all
Quick Guide
and uppercase letters with OK/ characters3 under the button, e.g. W, x, y, z
Located here is a selection of articles for get-
MENU. and 9. Quick presses on the button move the
ting to know the car's most common func-
cursor through these characters.
||}
tions. The articles can also be accessed via
Changes from the character
wheel to the search field. Move • Stop with the cursor on the desired char- categories, but are collected here for quick
acter in order to select it - the character is access.
the cursor with TUNE. Delete
shown on the enter line.
any misspelling with EXIT. To Turn TUNE to navigate in the Quick Guide
return to the character wheel, • Delete/undo using EXIT. and press OK/MENU to open an article.
press OK/MENU. To enter a number, hold in the corresponding Press EXIT to go back to the previous view.
number key.
Note that the digit and letter
buttons on the control panel Categories
can be used for editing in the The articles in the owner's manual are struc-
search field. tured into main categories and subcategories.

3 The character for each button may vary depending on market/country/language.


}}

17
01 Introduction
||
01 Navigating in an article Related information Recording data
• Support and information about the car on Certain information about the vehicle's opera-
the Internet (p. 20) tion and functionality, and any incidents, are
recorded in the car.

Your vehicle contains a number of computers


whose function is to continuously check and
monitor the vehicle's operation and function-
ality. Some of the computers can record
information during normal driving if they
detect an error. In addition, information is
recorded in the event of a collision or inci-
dent. Parts of the recorded information are
required so that technicians can diagnose
Home - leads to the start page for the and rectify faults in the vehicle during servic-
owner's manual. ing and maintenance and so that Volvo can
Favourite - adds/removes an article as a fulfil legal requirements and other regulations.
favourite. You can also press the FAV
In addition to this, the information is used for
button in the centre console to add/
research purposes by Volvo in order to con-
remove an article as a favourite.
tinually develop quality and safety, as the
Highlighted link - leads to linked article. information can contribute to a better under-
standing of the factors that cause accidents
Special texts - if the article contains
and injuries.
warnings, important or note texts then an
associated symbol is shown here as well The information includes details of the status
as the number of such texts in the article. and functionality of various systems and
Turn TUNE to navigate between the links or modules in the vehicle with regard to engine,
scroll in an article. When the screen has throttle, steering and brake systems, amongst
scrolled to the start/end of an article the other things. This information may include
home and favourite options are accessed by details regarding the way the driver drives the
scrolling a further step up/down. Press OK/ vehicle, such as vehicle speed, brake and
MENU to activate the selection/highlighted accelerator pedal use, steering wheel move-
link. Press EXIT to go back to the previous ment and whether or not the driver and pas-
view. sengers have used their seatbelts. For the

18
01 Introduction

reasons given this information may be stored Accessories and extra equipment 01
in the vehicle's computers for a certain length The incorrect connection and installation of
of time, but also as a result of a collision or accessories and extra equipment can nega-
incident. This information may be stored by tively affect the car's electronic system.
Volvo as long as it can help to further develop
and further enhance safety and quality and as Certain accessories only function when asso-
long as there are legal requirements and ciated software is installed in the car's com-
other regulations that Volvo needs to con- puter system. Volvo therefore recommends
sider. that you always contact an authorised Volvo
workshop before installing accessories or
Volvo will not contribute to the above-descri-
extra equipment which are connected to or
bed information being disclosed to third par-
affect the electrical system.
ties without the vehicle owner's consent.
However, due to national legislation and reg- Areas where IR film is not applied.
Heat-reflecting windscreen*
ulations Volvo may be required to disclose The windscreen is equipped with a heat-
such information to authorities such as police reflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat Dimensions
authorities, or others who may assert a legal radiation into the passenger compartment.
right to have access to it. A 65 mm
The positioning of electronic equipment, such
To be able to read and interpret the informa- as a transponder, behind a glass surface with B 150 mm
tion recorded by the computers in the vehicle heat-reflecting film may affect its function and C 125 mm
requires special technical equipment that performance.
Volvo, and workshops that have entered into
agreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvo For the optimal function of electronic equip-
is responsible that the information, which is ment, it should be positioned on the part of
transferred to Volvo during servicing and the windscreen with no heat-reflecting film
maintenance, is stored and handled in a (see the highlighted area in the illustration).
secure manner and that the handling com-
plies with applicable legal requirements. For
further information - contact a Volvo dealer.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 19


01 Introduction

01 Support and information about the car Downloadable information from the ments and warranties, amongst other things.
on the Internet support page At My Volvo Web there is also information
There is additional information regarding your about accessories and software adapted for
Maps
car on the Volvo Cars website and support your car model.
For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*,
page. From the website, it is also possible to there is the facility to download maps from Related information
navigate through to My Volvo, a personal web the support page.
page for you and your car.
• Volvo ID (p. 21)
Mobile apps
Support on the Internet For selected Volvo models from model year
2014 and 2015, the owner's manual is availa-
Go to support.volvocars.com or use the QR
ble in the form of an app. The VOC* app can
code below to visit the page. The support
also be accessed from here.
page is available for most markets.
Owner's manuals from previous model
years
Owner's manuals from previous model years
are available here in PDF format. The Quick
Guide and supplement can also be accessed
from the support page. Select car model and
model year in order to download the publica-
QR code that leads to the support page.
tion required.
The information on the support page is
searchable and can also be subdivided into Contact
different categories. Available here is support On the support page there is contact informa-
for options related to e.g. Internet connected tion for customer support and the nearest
services and functions, Volvo On Call (VOC)*, Volvo dealer.
the navigation system* and apps. Video and
step-by-step instructions explain different My Volvo on the Internet4
procedures, e.g. how the car is connected to From www.volvocars.com it is possible to
the Internet via a mobile phone. navigate through to My Volvo Web which is a
personal Web page for you and your car.
Create a personal Volvo ID, log in to My Volvo
Web and get an overview of service, agree-

4 Applies to certain markets.

20 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


01 Introduction

Volvo ID ate a Volvo ID via one of the following serv- 01


Volvo ID is your personal ID that provides ices:
access to various services5. • My Volvo - Enter your e-mail address and
follow the instructions.
Examples of services:
• For an Internet-connected car* - Enter
• My Volvo - Your personal web page for your e-mail address in the app that
you and your car. requires Volvo ID and follow the instruc-
• In an Internet-connected car* - Certain tions. Alternatively, press the Connect
functions and services require that you button in the centre console twice and
have registered your car to a personal select Apps Settings and follow the
Volvo ID, for example to be able to send a instructions.
new address from a map service on the
Internet directly to the car. • Volvo On Call, VOC* - Download the lat-
est version of the VOC app. Choose to
• Volvo On Call, VOC* - Volvo ID is used create a Volvo ID from the start page,
when logging in to the Volvo On Call enter e-mail address and follow the
mobile app. instructions.
Advantages of Volvo ID Related information
• One user name and one password to • Support and information about the car on
access online services, i.e. only one user- the Internet (p. 20)
name and one password to remember.
• When changing the username/password
for a service (e.g. VOC) it will also be
changed automatically for other services
(e.g. My Volvo Web)

Create a Volvo ID
To create a Volvo ID you need to enter a per-
sonal e-mail address. Then follow the instruc-
tions in the e-mail message that is automati-
cally sent to the specified address in order to
complete the registration. It is possible to cre-

5 The services available may vary over time and vary depending on equipment level and market.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 21


01 Introduction

01 Environmental philosophy tured in one of the cleanest and most development of safer and more efficient prod-
Your Volvo complies with strict international resource-efficient plants in the world. Volvo ucts and solutions in order to reduce the neg-
environmental standards and is also manufac- Car Corporation is constantly working on the ative impact on the environment.

Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars' core fuel consumption generally results in lower Clean air in the passenger
values, which influence all operations. We emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon diox- compartment
also believe that our customers share our ide. A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
consideration for the environment. and pollen from entering the passenger com-
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel
Volvo Cars has global ISO certification, which consumption. For more information, read partment via the air intake.
includes the environmental standard ISO under the heading "Contributing to a better A sophisticated air quality system Interior Air
14001 covering all factories and several of environment". Quality System* (IAQS) ensures that the
our other units. We also set requirements for incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traf-
our partners so that they work systematically Efficient emission control
fic outside.
with environmental issues. Your Volvo is manufactured following the
concept "Clean inside and out" – a concept The system consists of an electronic sensor
Fuel consumption that encompasses a clean interior environ- and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-
Volvo cars have competitive fuel consump- ment as well as highly efficient emission con- tored continuously and if there is an increase
tion in each of their respective classes. Lower trol. In many cases the exhaust emissions are in the level of certain unhealthy gases, such
well below the applicable standards.

22 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


01 Introduction

as carbon monoxide, then the air intake is periods. Pay attention to local regula- Recycling 01
closed. Such a situation may arise in heavy tions. As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is
traffic, queues and tunnels for example. • Drive economically - think ahead. important that the car is recycled in an envi-
ronmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level • Perform service and maintenance in
ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the accordance with the instructions in the car can be recycled. The last owner of the car
carbon filter. owner's manual - follow the Service and is therefore requested to contact a dealer for
Warranty Booklet's recommended inter- referral to a certified/approved recycling
Interior vals. facility.
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea-
• If the car is equipped with an engine Related information
sant and comfortable, even for people with block heater*, use it before starting from
contact allergies and for asthma sufferers. • The owner's manual and the environment
cold - it improves starting capacity and (p. 24)
Extreme attention has been given to choosing reduces wear in cold weather and the
environmentally-compatible materials. engine reaches normal operating tem-
perature more quickly, which lowers con-
Volvo workshops and the environment sumption and reduces emissions.
Regular maintenance creates the conditions
for a long service life and low fuel consump- • High speed increases consumption con-
siderably due to increased wind resis-
tion for your car. In this way you contribute to
tance - a doubling of speed increases
a cleaner environment. When Volvo's work-
wind resistance 4 times.
shops are entrusted with the service and
maintenance of your car it becomes part of • Always dispose of environmentally hazar-
our system. Volvo makes clear demands dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in
regarding the way in which our workshops an environmentally safe manner. Consult
are designed in order to prevent spills and a workshop in the event of uncertainty
about how this type of waste should be
discharges into the environment. Our work-
discarded - an authorised Volvo work-
shop staff have the knowledge and the tools
shop is recommended.
required to guarantee good environmental
care. Following this advice can save money, the
planet's resources are saved, and the car's
Contributing to a better environment durability is extended. For more information
It is easy to contribute to a better environ- and further advice, see Eco guide (p. 66),
ment - here are a few tips: Economical driving (p. 300) and Fuel con-
sumption (p. 403).
• Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off
the engine when stationary for longer

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 23


01 Introduction

01 The owner's manual and the Laminated glass


environment
The paper pulp in a printed owner's manual The glass is reinforced which pro-
vides better protection against
comes from Forest Stewardship Council® cer-
break-ins and improved sound insu-
tified forests or other controlled sources.
lation in the passenger compart-
The FSC® symbol shows that the paper pulp ment. The windscreen and other windows*
in a printed owner's manual comes from have laminated glass.
FSC® certified forests or other controlled
sources.

Related information
• Environmental philosophy (p. 22)

24 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


SAFETY
02 Safety

General information on seatbelts Remember Related information


Heavy braking can have serious consequen- • Do not use clips or anything else that can • Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 28)
ces if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly. • Seatbelt - loosening (p. 28)
all passengers are using their seatbelts during • The seatbelt must not be twisted or • Seatbelt tensioner (p. 29)
02 the journey. caught on anything.

WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a
seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly,
this may diminish the protection provided
by the airbag in the event of a collision.

WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one per-
son.

Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the WARNING
diagonal shoulder belt up towards the shoulder.
The hip strap must be positioned low down (not Never modify or repair the seatbelts your-
over the abdomen). self. Volvo recommends that you contact
an authorised Volvo workshop.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a
the body so it can provide maximum protec-
major load, such as in conjunction with a
tion. Do not lean the backrest too far back. collision, the entire seatbelt must be
The seatbelt is designed to protect in a nor- replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective
mal seating position. properties may have been lost even if the
seatbelt does not appear damaged. The
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fas-
seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows
ten their (p. 27) seatbelt by means of an signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt
audio and visual reminder (p. 29). must be type-approved and designed for
installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.

26
02 Safety

Seatbelt - putting on Remember


Put on the seatbelt (p. 26) before driving The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
starts. • if it is pulled out too quickly
Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by • during braking and acceleration 02
pressing its locking tab into the seatbelt • if the car leans heavily.
buckle. A loud "click" indicates that the belt
has locked. Related information
• Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 28)
• Seatbelt - loosening (p. 28)
• Seatbelt tensioner (p. 29)

Incorrectly fitted seatbelt. The belt must rest on


• Seatbelt reminder (p. 29)
the shoulder.

Correctly fitted seatbelt.

Seatbelt height adjustment. Press the button and


move the belt vertically. Position the belt as high
as possible without it chafing against your throat.
The locking tab at the centre rear seat only
fits into the intended seatbelt buckle.

27
02 Safety

Seatbelt - loosening Seatbelt - pregnancy The aim should be to position the seat with as
Loosen the seatbelt (p. 26) when the car is Seatbelt (p. 26) must always be worn during large a distance as possible between abdo-
stationary. pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in men and steering wheel.
the correct way.
02 Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle Related information
and then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt • Seatbelt - putting on (p. 27)
does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so • Seatbelt - loosening (p. 28)
that it does not hang loose.

Related information
• Seatbelt - putting on (p. 27)
• Seatbelt reminder (p. 29)

G020998
The diagonal section should wrap over the
shoulder then be routed between the breasts
and to the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs
and as low as possible under the abdomen. –
It must never be allowed to ride upward.
Remove the slack from the seatbelt and
ensure that it fits as close to the body as pos-
sible. In addition, check that there are no
twists in the seatbelt.
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant dri-
vers must adjust the seat (p. 78) and steer-
ing wheel (p. 83) such that they can easily
maintain control of the vehicle as they drive
(which means that they must be able to easily
operate the foot pedals and steering wheel).

28
02 Safety

Seatbelt reminder automatically after approximately Seatbelt tensioner


Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fas- 30 seconds driving or after pressing the Seatbelts (p. 26) on the driver's side, the pas-
ten their (p. 27) seatbelt by means of an audio indicator stalk OK button (p. 106). If any- senger side and at the outer rear seats are fit-
and visual reminder. one is unbelted then the message can ted with seatbelt tensioners. A mechanism in
only be acknowledged manually by 02
the seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in
pressing the indicator stalk OK button.
the event of a sufficiently violent collision. The
• Provides a warning if one of the rear seat- seatbelt then provides more effective restraint
belts is unfastened during travel. This for the occupants.
warning takes the form of a message in
the combined instrument panel along with WARNING
the audio/visual signal. The warning stops
when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can Never insert the tongue of the passenger's
also be acknowledged manually by seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's
pressing the OK button. side. Always insert the tongue of the seat-
belt into the buckle on the correct side. Do
The combined instrument panel's information not make any damages on seatbelts nor
display shows which seatbelts are in use. insert any foreign objects into a buckle.
This information is always available. The seatbelts and buckles would then
possibly not function as intended in the
The audio reminder is speed dependent, and event of a collision. There is a risk of
in some cases time dependent. The visual serous injury.
reminder is located in the roof console and in
the combined instrument panel (p. 62). Related information
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt • General information on seatbelts (p. 26)
reminder system.

Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
• Provides information on which seatbelts
(p. 26) are being used in the rear seat. A
message appears in the combined instru-
ment panel when the seatbelts are in use,
or if one of the rear doors has been
opened. The message is acknowledged

29
02 Safety

Safety - warning symbol WARNING


The warning symbol is shown if a fault is
If the warning symbol for the airbag sys-
detected during fault tracing or if a system tem remains illuminated or illuminates
has been activated. Where required, the while driving, it means that the airbag sys-
02 warning symbol is shown together with a tem does not have full functionality. The
message in the combined instrument panel symbol indicates a fault in the airbag sys-
(p. 62) information display. tem, the belt tensioner system, SIPS, the
IC system or some other fault in the sys-
tem. Volvo recommends that you contact
an authorised Volvo workshop immedi-
ately.

Warning triangle and warning symbol for the air- Related information
bag system in the digital combined instrument • General information on safety mode
panel. (p. 41)
The warning symbol in the combined instru-
ment panel is switched on with the remote
control key in key position II (p. 77), fault
tracing is performed each time the ignition is
switched on. The symbol clears after
Warning triangle and warning symbol for the air- approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag sys-
bag system (p. 31) in the analogue combined tem is fault-free.
instrument panel.
The warning symbol is shown if a fault is
detected during fault tracing or if a system
has been activated. Where required, the
warning symbol is shown together with a
message in the display. If the warning symbol
malfunctions, the warning triangle illuminates
and SRS airbag Service required or SRS
airbag Service urgent appears in the dis-
play. Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop immediately.

30
02 Safety

Airbag system The system consists of airbags and sensors. Related information
In the event of a frontal collision the airbag A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors • Airbags on driver's side (p. 32)
system helps to protect the head, face and and the airbag(s) are inflated and become • Passenger airbag (p. 32)
chest of the driver and passenger. hot. The airbag cushions the initial collision
impact for the occupant. The airbag deflates • Safety - warning symbol (p. 30)
02
when compressed by the collision. When this
occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is
completely normal. The entire process,
including inflation and deflation of the airbag,
occurs within tenths of a second.

WARNING
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop for repair.
G018665 Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious
personal injury.
Airbag system viewed from above, left-hand-
drive car.
NOTE
The detectors react differently depending
on the nature of the collision and whether
or not the seatbelt is fastened. Applies to
all seatbelt positions apart from centre
seat rear.
It is therefore possible that only one (or
none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli-
sion. The detectors sense the force of the
collision on the vehicle and the action is
adapted accordingly so that one or more
G018666

airbags are deployed.

Airbag system viewed from above, right-hand-


drive car.

31
02 Safety

Airbags on driver's side Related information Passenger airbag


To supplement the protection afforded by the • Passenger airbag (p. 32) To supplement the protection afforded by the
seatbelt (p. 26) on the driver side, the car is seatbelt (p. 26) on the passenger side, the car
equipped with two airbags (p. 31). is equipped with an airbag (p. 31).
02
One of the airbags is folded up into the centre The airbag is folded up into a compartment
of the steering wheel. The steering wheel is above the glovebox. Its cover panel is
marked AIRBAG. marked AIRBAG.

Knee airbag on the driver's side in a left-hand- Location of the front passenger airbag in a left-
drive car. hand drive car.
The second airbag (at knee level) is fitted in
the lower part of the instrument panel on the
driver's side; this panel is labelled AIRBAG.

WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by
the airbags in the event of a collision.

32
02 Safety

WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is
located.
02

WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the air-
bag is activated.
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
of the front passenger seat.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a right- Alternative 2: Position of airbag label on passen-
hand drive car. ger side door pillar. The label becomes visible No one shorter than 140 cm should ever
when the passenger door is opened. sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag
The warning label for the passenger airbag is is activated.
fitted in one of the following two locations in
the car:
WARNING Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on a
seat protected by an activated airbag. Fail-
ure to follow this advice can lead to death Switch - PACOS*
or serious injury to the child. The front passenger airbag can be deacti-
vated (p. 34) if the car is equipped with a
switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off
WARNING Switch).
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
WARNING
may diminish the protection provided by If the car is equipped with a front passen-
the airbag in the event of a collision. ger airbag, but does not have a PACOS
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag switch (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch),
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as then the airbag will always be activated.
Alternative 1: Position of airbag label on passen- possible with their feet on the floor and
ger side sun visor. backs against the backrest. Seatbelts
must be secured.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 33


02 Safety
||
Related information Passenger airbag - activating/ never children in a child seat or on a
• Airbags on driver's side (p. 32) deactivating* booster cushion.
• Child seats (p. 46) Front passenger airbag (p. 32) can be deacti- The airbag is deactivated. With the switch
vated if the car is equipped with a switch, in this position, children in a child seat or
02 PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). on a booster cushion can sit in the front
passenger seat, but never persons taller
Switch - PACOS than 140 cm.
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)
is located on the passenger end of the instru- WARNING
ment panel and is accessible when the pas-
senger door is open. Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Check that the switch is in the required posi- Never place a child in a child seat or on a
tion. The remote control key's key blade booster cushion on the front passenger
seat when the airbag is activated. This
(p. 165) should be used to change position. applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat when the air-
bag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life.

NOTE
When the remote control key is in key
position II (p. 77) the warning symbol
(p. 30) for the airbag is shown in the com-
Location of airbag switch. bined instrument panel for
The airbag is activated. With the switch in approx. 6 seconds.
this position, persons taller than 140 cm Following which, the indicator in the roof
can sit in the front passenger seat, but console is illuminated showing the correct
status for the front passenger seat airbag.

34 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


02 Safety

WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger the lives of passengers in
the car.
02

Related information
• Child seats (p. 46)

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
activated. deactivated.
A text message and a warning symbol in the A text message and a symbol in the roof con-
roof console indicate that the airbag for the sole indicate that the airbag for the front pas-
front passenger seat is activated (see preced- senger seat is deactivated (see preceding
ing illustration). illustration).

WARNING WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas-
booster cushion in the front seat if the air- senger seat if the message in the roof con-
bag is activated and the symbol in sole indicates that the airbag is deacti-
the roof console is illuminated. Failure to vated, and if the warning symbol (p. 30) for
follow this advice could endanger the life the airbag system is also displayed on the
of the child. combined instrument panel. This indicates
that there has been a severe malfunction.
Visit a workshop as soon as possible.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.

35
02 Safety

Side airbag (SIPS) WARNING


In a side impact collision a large proportion of
the collision force is transferred by the SIPS
• Volvo recommends that repairs are
only carried out by an authorised Volvo
(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, workshop. Defective work in the SIPS-
02 pillars, the floor, the roof and other structural bag system could cause malfunction
parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv- and result in serious personal injury.
er's and front passenger seats protect the
chest area and the hip and are an important • Do not put objects in the area between
the outside of the seat and the door
part of the SIPS.
panel, since this area is required by
the side airbag.
• Volvo recommends the use only of car
Driver's seat, left-hand drive. seat covers approved by Volvo. Other
seat covers may impede the operation
of the side airbags.
• Side airbags are a supplement the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Related information
• Airbags on driver's side (p. 32)
• Passenger airbag (p. 32)

The SIPS bag system consists of two main


• Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster
cushion (p. 37)
components, side airbag and sensors. The
side airbags are located in the front seat's • Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 37)
backrests. Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag
inflates between the occupant and the door
panel and thereby cushions the initial impact.
The airbag deflates when compressed by the
collision. The side airbag is normally only
deployed on the side of the collision.

36
02 Safety

Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster Inflatable Curtain (IC) WARNING


cushion The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
The protection provided by the car to children driver and passengers from striking their handles in the roof. The hook is only
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion heads on the inside of the car during a colli- designed for light clothing (not for solid
is not diminished by the side airbag (p. 36). sion. objects such as umbrellas for example). 02

Child seat/booster cushion (p. 46) can be Do not screw or install anything onto the
placed on the front passenger seat provided car's headlining, door pillars or side pan-
els. This could compromise the intended
that the car does not have an activated airbag protection. Volvo recommends that you
(p. 34) on the front passenger side. only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are
approved for placement in these areas.
Related information
• Passenger airbag (p. 32)
• General information on child safety WARNING
(p. 45) Do not load the car higher than 50 mm
under the top edge of the windows in the
doors. Otherwise, the intended protection
of the inflatable curtain, which is con-
cealed in the headlining, may be compro-
The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is mised.
part of the SIPS system (p. 36). It is fitted
along the headlining on both sides and helps
protect the driver and passengers in the car's
WARNING
outer seats. A sufficiently violent collision The inflatable curtain is a supplement to
trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is the seatbelts.
inflated. Always use a seatbelt.

Related information
• General information on seatbelts (p. 26)
• Airbag system (p. 31)
• Side airbag (SIPS) (p. 36)

37
02 Safety

General information on WHIPS WARNING


(whiplash protection)
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the
WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) is a pro- seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
tection against whiplash injuries. The system
02 consists of energy absorbing backrests and
specially designed head restraints in the front Seat properties
seats. When the WHIPS system is deployed, the
front seat backrests are lowered backward to
change the seating position of the driver and
front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of
whiplash injury.

WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
system yourself. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo work-
shop.

Related information
• WHIPS - child seats (p. 39)
• WHIPS - seating position (p. 39)
• General information on seatbelts (p. 26)

The WHIPS system is actuated by a rear-end


collision, where the angle and speed of the
collision, and the nature of the colliding vehi-
cle all have an influence.

38
02 Safety

WHIPS - child seats WHIPS - seating position WARNING


The protection provided by the car to children In order to obtain optimum protection from
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion the WHIPS system (p. 38) the driver and pas- rear seat cushion and the front seat's
is not diminished by the WHIPS system senger must have the correct seating position backrest. Make sure you do not to
(p. 38). and make sure that the system's function is obstruct the function of the WHIPS sys- 02
not obstructed. tem.
Child seat/booster cushion (p. 46) can be
placed on the front passenger seat provided Seating position
that the car does not have an activated airbag Set the correct seating position in the front
(p. 34) on the front passenger side. seat (p. 78) before driving starts.
Related information Driver and front seat passenger should sit in
• General information on child safety the centre of the seat with as little space as
(p. 45) possible between the head and the head
restraint.

Function

Do not place objects on the rear seat that may


prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.

WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the
corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not touch the
folded backrest.
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the
driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the
WHIPS system from functioning.

}}

39
02 Safety

WARNING When the systems deploy System Triggered


In the event of a collision Volvo's different
If a seat has been subjected to extreme Inflatable Curtain In the event of a
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, personal safety systems work together in
the WHIPS system must be checked. order to minimise injury. IC (p. 37) side impact and/or
02 Volvo recommends that it is checked by overturning and/or
an authorised Volvo workshop. System Triggered some frontal colli-
Part of the WHIPS system's protective
sionsB
Seatbelt ten- In the event of a
capacity may have been lost even if the Whiplash protection In a rear-end colli-
seat appears to be undamaged. sioner (p. 29) front frontal collision,
seat and/or side-impact WHIPS (p. 38) sion
Volvo recommends that you contact an collision, and/or
authorised Volvo workshop to have the A There is no seatbelt tensioner at the centre rear seat.
rear-end collision B The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a
system checked even after a minor rear- collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors
end collision. and/or overturning such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed
of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the
Seatbelt ten- In a frontal collision different safety systems of the car are activated.
sioner (p. 29) rear and/or side-impact
seatA accident and/or If the airbags (p. 31) have deployed, the fol-
overturning lowing is recommended:
• Recovering the car. Volvo recommends
Airbags In a frontal colli- that you have it conveyed to an author-
(Steering wheel, sionB ised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with
knee (p. 32) and pas- deployed airbags.
senger airbag (p. 32)) • Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
Side airbags In a side-impact replacement of components in the car's
(SIPS) (p. 36) accidentB safety systems.
• Always contact a doctor.

NOTE
The airbags and belt tensioner system are
deployed only once during a collision.

40
02 Safety

WARNING General information on safety mode


Safety mode is a protective state that is
The airbag system's control module is
located in the centre console. If the centre enforced when the collision may have dam-
console is drenched with water or other aged any of the car's vital functions, such as
liquid, disconnect the battery cables. Do the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety 02
not attempt to start the car since the air- systems, or the brake system.
bags may deploy. Recovering the car.
Volvo recommends that you have it con-
veyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They Warning triangle in the digital combined instru-
can make steering difficult. Other safety ment panel.
systems may also be damaged. The
smoke and dust created when the airbags If the car is involved in a collision, the text
are deployed can cause skin and eye irrita- Safety mode See manual may appear in the
tion/injury after intensive exposure. In case combined instrument panel (p. 62) informa-
of irritation, wash with cold water. The tion display. This means that the car has
rapid deployment sequence and airbag reduced functionality.
fabric may cause friction and skin burns. Warning triangle in the analogue combined
instrument panel.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset
the electronics yourself if the car has been
in safety mode. This could result in per-
sonal injury or the car not functioning as
normal. Volvo recommends that you
engage an authorised Volvo workshop to
check and restore the car to normal status
after Safety mode See manual has been
displayed.

}}

41
02 Safety
||
Related information Safety mode - attempting to start the WARNING
• Safety mode - attempting to start the car car
(p. 42) Never, under any circumstances, attempt
If the car is set in safety mode (p. 41) then an to restart the car if it smells of fuel when
• Safety mode - moving the car (p. 43) attempt to start the car can be made if every- the Safety mode See manual message
02 thing seems normal and the absence of fuel is displayed. Leave the car at once.
leakage has been checked.

First, check that no fuel is leaking from the WARNING


car. There must be no smell of fuel either.
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
If everything seems normal and you have towed. It must be transported from its
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you location. Volvo recommends that it is
may attempt to start the car. transported to an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Remove the remote control key and open the
driver's door. If a message is now shown to
Related information
the effect that the ignition is on, press the
start button. Then close the door and reinsert
• Safety mode - moving the car (p. 43)
the remote control key. The car's electronics
will now try to reset themselves to normal
mode. Then try to start the car.
If the message Safety mode See manual is
still shown on the display, then the car must
not be driven or towed, but a vehicle recovery
service (p. 310) must be used instead. Even if
the car appears to be driveable, hidden dam-
age may make the car impossible to control
once moving.

42
02 Safety

Safety mode - moving the car Pedestrian airbag NOTE


If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode The airbag for pedestrians (Pedestrian Airbag)
There may be objects in the traffic environ-
See manual has been reset after attempting contributes in certain frontal collisions to alle- ment that prompt a signal to the sensors
to start the car (p. 42) , the car can be moved viating the collision of the pedestrian with the that is similar to a collision with a pedes-
carefully out of a dangerous position. car. trian. It is possible that the system will be 02
activated in the event of a collision with
Do not move the car further than necessary. such an object.
Related information
• General information on safety mode If the airbag is activated (Pedestrian Airbag)
(p. 41) • the rear part of the bonnet is raised and
locked in this position
• the hazard warning flashers are activated
• the brake system is prepared for the
upcoming emergency braking.

WARNING
Do not fit any accessories or change any-
The pedestrian airbag (Pedestrian Airbag) is thing in the front. Incorrect intervention at
fitted under the bonnet near the windscreen. the front may cause incorrect function in
In the event of certain frontal collisions with a the system and lead to serious injury and
pedestrian, the sensors in the front bumper damage to the car.
react and the airbag inflates if required, based Volvo recommends that genuine wiper
on the force of the impact. The sensors are arms are used and that you only use genu-
active at a speed of approx. 20-50 km/h and ine parts for them.
an ambient temperature between
-20 and +70°C.
WARNING
The sensors are designed to detect a collision
Volvo recommends contacting an author-
with an object that has similar properties to ised Volvo workshop in the event of dam-
those of the human leg. age to the bumper in order to ensure that
the system is intact.

}}

43
02 Safety
||
Related information Pedestrian airbag - moving the car Pedestrian airbag - folding up
• Pedestrian airbag - moving the car The car may be moved if it has not been set in Pedestrian airbag (p. 43) (Pedestrian Airbag)
(p. 44) safety mode (p. 41). must be folded up before the car is moved.
• Pedestrian airbag - folding up (p. 44)
02 If any of the other airbags in the passenger
compartment were activated then the car
remains in safety mode.
If only the pedestrian airbag (p. 43)
(Pedestrian Airbag) has been activated:
1. Move the car to a safe location as close
as possible.
2. Fold up the airbag in accordance with the
instructions (p. 44).
3. Seek the nearest workshop.

Airbag
WARNING
Volvo recommends that, after activation of Airbag housing
the airbag, you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop as soon as possible. Velcro strap, right-hand side

Velcro strap, left-hand side


Related information
The airbag may feel warm and give off
• Pedestrian airbag (p. 43)
smoke. This is normal. Fold the airbag as fol-
lows:
1. Find the Velcro strap on the
left-hand side (4).
2. Gather the airbag fabric along its length
on the left-hand side. Then fold the gath-
ered fabric towards the centre. Wind the
Velcro strap (double sided) around as
much fabric as possible and fasten it.

44
02 Safety

3. Press the rolled up portion of the airbag General information on child safety NOTE
into the airbag housing (2). Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
In the event of questions when fitting child
4. Repeat points 1-3 for the right-hand side. correctly secured in the car. Never allow a safety products, contact the manufacturer
It may be necessary to fold the gathered child to sit on the knee of a passenger. for clearer instructions.
fabric twice on this side in order to wind 02
Volvo recommends that children travel in
the Velcro strap around it.
rear-facing child seats until as late an age as Child safety locks
5. The airbag housing cover will be open possible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and The controls for operating the rear door
slightly. This is completely normal. then front-facing booster cushions/child seats power windows and the rear door opening
until up to 10 years of age. handles can be blocked (p. 177) from open-
Related information ing from the inside.
• Pedestrian airbag - moving the car (p. 44) The position of a child in the car and the
choice of equipment are dictated by the Related information
child's weight and size; see Child seats • Child seats (p. 46)
(p. 46).
• Child seats - location (p. 50)
NOTE • Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 51)

Regulations regarding the placement of


• Child seats - upper mounting points
(p. 54)
children in cars vary from country to coun-
try. Check what does apply.

Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,


booster cushions & attachment devices)
which is designed for your particular car.
Using Volvo's child safety equipment pro-
vides you with optimum conditions for your
child to travel safely in the car. Furthermore,
the child safety equipment fits and is easy to
use.

45
02 Safety

Child seats NOTE


Children should sit comfortably and safely.
When using child safety products it is
Make sure that the child seat is being used important to read the installation instruc-
correctly. tions included.
02

WARNING
Do not secure the straps of the child seat
to the seat's horizontal adjustment bar,
springs or the rails and beams under the
seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.

Look in the installation instructions for the


child seat for the correct fitting.
G020739

Child seats and airbags are not compatible.

46
02 Safety

Recommended child seats1


Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag) Outer rear seat Centre rear
seat
Group 0 Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child 02
seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system.
max 10 kg
Type approval: E1 04301146
Group 0+
(L)
max 13 kg

Group 0 Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child Volvo infant
child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt. seat, secured with the car's seatbelt. seat (Volvo
max 10 kg
Infant Seat) -
Type approval: E1 04301146 Type approval: E1 04301146
Group 0+ rear-facing child
(U) (U) seat, secured
max 13 kg with the car's
seatbelt.
Type approval:
E1 04301146
(U)

Group 0 Child seats which are universally approved.A Child seats which are universally approved.
max 10 kg (U) (U)

Group 0+
max 13 kg

1 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
}}

47
02 Safety
||
Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag) Outer rear seat Centre rear
seat
Group 1 Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible
02 Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's
9-18 kg
secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192 Type approval: E5 04192
(L) (L)

Group 1 Child seats which are universally approved.A Child seats which are universally approved.
9-18 kg (U) (U)

Group 2 Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible
Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's
15-25 kg
secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192 Type approval: E5 04192
(L) (L)

Group 2 Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible
Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the
15-25 kg
secured with the car's seatbelt. car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191 Type approval: E5 04191
(U) (U)

Group 2/3 Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat
Seat with backrest). with backrest).
15-36 kg
Type approval: E1 04301169 Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF) (UF)

48
02 Safety

Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag) Outer rear seat Centre rear
seat
Group 2/3 Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster
Cushion with and without backrest). Cushion with and without backrest). 02
15-36 kg
Type approval: E5 04216 Type approval: E5 04216
(UF) (UF)

L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.
B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.
A Only for rear-facing child seat. Set the seat's backrest in upright position.

Related information
• Child seats - location (p. 50)
• Child seats - upper mounting points
(p. 54)
• Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 51)
• General information on child safety (p. 45)

49
02 Safety

Child seats - location WARNING


Always fit child seats/booster cushions (p. 46)
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is acti- booster cushion in the front seat if the air-
vated (p. 34). If a child is sitting on the front bag is activated.
02 passenger seat then he/she could suffer seri-
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
ous injury if the airbag deploys.
of the front passenger seat.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is No one shorter than 140 cm should ever
fitted in one of the following two locations in sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag
the car: is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life.
Alternative 2: Position of airbag label on passen-
ger side door pillar. The label becomes visible
when the passenger door is opened. WARNING
You may place: Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could
• a child seat/booster cushion on the front rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening but-
passenger seat provided there is no acti- ton must not be used, as they could cause
vated airbag on the front passenger side. the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
• one or more child seats/booster cushions Do not allow the upper section of the child
in the rear seat. seat to rest against the windscreen.

Alternative 1: Position of airbag label on passen- WARNING


ger side sun visor. Related information
Never use a rear-facing child seat on a
seat protected by an activated airbag. Fail- • General information on child safety (p. 45)
ure to follow this advice can lead to death • Child seats - upper mounting points
or serious injury to the child. (p. 54)
• Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 51)

50
02 Safety

Child seat - ISOFIX ISOFIX - size classes WARNING


ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats There is a size classification for child seats
Never place the child in the passenger
(p. 46) that is based on an international stand- using the ISOFIX (p. 51) fixture system in seat if the car is fitted with an activated air-
ard. order to assist users in choosing the correct bag.
type of child seat (p. 52). 02

Size Description NOTE


class If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi-
cation, the car model must be included on
A Full size, front-facing child the vehicle list for the child seat.
seat

B Reduced size (alt. 1), front- NOTE


facing child seat
Volvo recommends that you contact an
B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front-fac- authorised Volvo dealer for recommenda-
ing child seat tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo
recommends.
C Full size, rear-facing child seat
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system
are located at the lower section of the rear Related information
D Reduced size, rear-facing
seat backrest, in the outer seats. child seat • ISOFIX - types of child seat (p. 52)

The location of the mounting points is indi-


E Rear-facing infant seat
cated by symbols in the backrest upholstery
(see preceding illustration). F Transverse infant seat, left-
Always follow the manufacturer's installation hand
instructions when connecting a child seat to G Transverse infant seat, right-
the ISOFIX mounting points. hand
Related information
• ISOFIX - size classes (p. 51)
• ISOFIX - types of child seat (p. 52)
• General information on child safety (p. 45)

51
02 Safety

ISOFIX - types of child seat seats are suitable for all seats in all car mod-
Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in els.
different sizes. This means that not all child

02 Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIXA installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Infant seat transverse max 10 kg F X X

G X X

Infant seat, rear-facing max 10 kg E X OK


(IL)

Infant seat, rear-facing max 13 kg E X OK


(IL)

D X OK
(IL)

C X OK
(IL)

Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D X OK


(IL)

C X OK
(IL)

52
02 Safety

Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIXA installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X OKB 02
(IUF)

B1 X OKB
(IUF)

A X OKB
(IUF)

X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.
IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for a particular car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.
A ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats that is based on an international standard.
B Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.

Make sure you select the right size class


(p. 51) of child seat with ISOFIX fixture sys-
tem.

Related information
• Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 51)

53
02 Safety

Child seats - upper mounting points NOTE


The car is equipped with upper mounting
In cars with a cargo cover over the lug-
points for certain front-facing child seats gage compartment, this must be removed
(p. 46). These mounting points are located on before child seats can be attached to the
02 the rear of the seat. securing points.
Upper mounting points
For detailed information on how the child seat
should be tensioned in the upper mounting
points, see the seat manufacturer's instruc-
tions.

WARNING
The child seat's straps must always be
drawn through the hole in the head
restraint leg before they are tensioned at
the attachment point.

Related information
The upper mounting points are primarily • General information on child safety (p. 45)
intended for use with front-facing child seats. • Child seats - location (p. 50)
Volvo recommends that small children should • Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 51)
sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age
as possible.

NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facili-
tate fitting this type of child seat in cars
with folding head restraints on the outer
seats.

54
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
03 Instruments and controls

Instruments and controls, left-hand


drive car - overview
The overview shows where the car's displays
and controls are located.

03

56
03 Instruments and controls

Overview, left-hand drive cars

03

}}

57
03 Instruments and controls
||
Function See Function See Function See
Menus and mes- (p. 106), Door handle – Light switch, (p. 84) and
sages, direction (p. 108), opener for tailgate (p. 174).
indicators, main/ (p. 92), Control panel (p. 173),
dipped beam, trip (p. 87) and (p. 178), Seat adjustment* (p. 80).
computer (p. 119). (p. 100) and
(p. 102). Related information
Manual gear chang- (p. 270). • Outside temperature gauge (p. 71)
03 ing in an automatic Hazard warning (p. 91).
gearbox* flashers • Trip meter (p. 71)
• Clock (p. 71)
Cruise control* (p. 194) and Control panel for (p. 109) and
(p. 199). infotainment sys- the Sensus
tem and menu navi- Infotainment
Horn, airbags (p. 83) and gation supplement.
(p. 31).
Control panel for (p. 128) or
Combined instru- (p. 62). climate control (p. 129).
ment panel
Gear selector (p. 269),
Menu navigation, (p. 109) and (p. 270) or
audio control, the Sensus (p. 274).
phone control* Infotainment
supplement. Parking brake (p. 290).

START/STOP (p. 266). Wipers and wash- (p. 98).


ENGINE button ing
Ignition switch (p. 76). Steering wheel (p. 83).
adjustment
Screen for infotain- (p. 109) and
ment and display of the Sensus Bonnet opener (p. 351).
menus Infotainment
supplement.

58 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


03 Instruments and controls

Instruments and controls, right-hand


drive car - overview
The overview shows where the car's displays
and controls are located.

03

}}

59
03 Instruments and controls
||
Overview, right-hand drive cars

03

60
03 Instruments and controls

Function See Function See Function See


Wipers and wash- (p. 98). Control panel (p. 173), Light switch, (p. 84) and
ing (p. 178), opener for tailgate (p. 174).
(p. 100) and
Manual gear chang- (p. 270). (p. 102). Seat adjustment* (p. 80).
ing in an automatic
gearbox* Bonnet opener (p. 351). Related information
Menu navigation, (p. 109) and • Outside temperature gauge (p. 71)
03
Hazard warning (p. 91).
audio control, the Sensus flashers • Trip meter (p. 71)
phone control* Infotainment • Clock (p. 71)
supplement. Control panel for (p. 109) and
infotainment sys- the Sensus
Horn, airbags (p. 83) and tem and menu navi- Infotainment
(p. 31). gation supplement.
Combined instru- (p. 62). Control panel for (p. 128) or
ment panel climate control (p. 129).
Cruise control* (p. 194) and Gear selector (p. 269),
(p. 199). (p. 270) or
(p. 274).
START/STOP (p. 266).
ENGINE button Parking brake (p. 290).
Ignition switch (p. 76). Menus and mes- (p. 106),
sages, direction (p. 108),
Screen for infotain- (p. 109) and
indicators, main/ (p. 92),
ment and display of the Sensus
dipped beam, trip (p. 87) and
menus Infotainment
computer (p. 119).
supplement.
Steering wheel (p. 83).
Door handle –
adjustment

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 61


03 Instruments and controls

Combined instrument panel Analogue combined instrument panel Gauges and indicators
The combined instrument panel's information - overview
display shows information on some of the The combined instrument panel's information
car's functions, as well as messages. display shows information on some of the
car's functions, as well as messages.
• Analogue combined instrument panel -
overview (p. 62) Information display
• Digital combined instrument panel - over-
view (p. 63)
03
• Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 67)
• Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 69)
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking1, the yellow indi-
cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer -
supplementary information (p. 119) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 295).
Information display, analogue instrument panel.
Eco meter The meter provides an indica-
There are further descriptions under the func- tion of how economically the car is being
tions that use the display. driven. The higher the reading on the
scale, the more economical it is.
Speedometer

Tachometer. The meter indicates engine


speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Gear shift indicator2 / Gear position indi-
cator3. See also Gear shift indicator*

1
When the display's message Distance to empty fuel tank: starts to show ----, the marking becomes red.
2 Manual gearbox.
3 Automatic gearbox.

62 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


03 Instruments and controls

(p. 270), Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* If the engine does not start or if the function- Digital combined instrument panel -
(p. 270) or Automatic gearbox - ality check is carried out in key position II overview
Powershift* (p. 274). then all symbols go out within a few seconds The combined instrument panel's information
except the symbol for faults in the car's emis- display shows information on some of the
Indicator and warning symbols sions system and the symbol for low oil pres- car's functions, as well as messages.
sure.
Information display
Related information
• Combined instrument panel (p. 62)
03
• Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 67)
• Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 69)
• Digital combined instrument panel - over-
view (p. 63)

Indicator and warning symbols, analogue instru-


ment panel.
Indicator symbols Information display, digital instrument panel*.
Indicator and warning symbols There are further descriptions under the func-
tions that use the display.
Warning symbols4
Gauges and indicators
Functionality check Various themes can be selected for the digital
All indicator and warning symbols, apart from combined instrument panel. Possible themes
symbols in the centre of the information dis- are "Elegance", "Eco" and "Performance".
play, illuminate in key position II or when the
engine is started. When the engine has A theme can only be selected when the
started, all the symbols should go out except engine is running.
the parking brake symbol, which only goes
out when the brake is disengaged.

4 Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via display text. For
more information, see Engine oil - general (p. 352).
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 63


03 Instruments and controls
||
To select the theme, press the left-hand stalk (p. 270) or Automatic gearbox -
switch's OK button and select the Themes Powershift* (p. 274).
menu option by turning the thumbwheel on
the lever. Press the OK button. Turn the
thumbwheel to select the theme and confirm
the selection by pressing the OK button.
On certain model variants, the appearance of
the centre console's screen follows the theme
03 selected for the combined instrument panel.
The contrast mode and colour mode for the
instrument can also be set using the left-hand
stalk switch. Gauges and indicators, theme "Elegance".
For more information on menu navigation, Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
see Menu navigation - combined instrument only one white marking5, the yellow indi- Gauges and indicators, theme "Eco".
panel (p. 106). cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
The choice of theme and setting of contrast is illuminated. See also Trip computer - only one white marking5, the yellow indi-
mode and colour mode can be stored for supplementary information (p. 119) and cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
each remote control key in the car key mem- Filling up with fuel (p. 295). is illuminated. See also Trip computer -
ory*, see Remote control key - personalisa- Temperature gauge for engine coolant supplementary information (p. 119) and
tion* (p. 158). Filling up with fuel (p. 295).
Speedometer
Eco guide. See also Eco guide & Power
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine guide* (p. 66).
speed in thousands of revolutions per Speedometer
minute (rpm).
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
Gear shift indicator6 / Gear position indi-
speed in thousands of revolutions per
cator7. See also Gear shift indicator* minute (rpm).
(p. 270), Automatic gearbox - Geartronic*
Gear shift indicator6 / Gear position indi-
cator7. See also Gear shift indicator*

5
When the display's message Distance to empty fuel tank: starts to show ----, the marking becomes red.
6 Manual gearbox.
7 Automatic gearbox.

64 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


03 Instruments and controls

(p. 270), Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* Power guide. See also Eco guide & Functionality check
(p. 270) or Automatic gearbox - Power guide* (p. 66). All indicator and warning symbols, apart from
Powershift* (p. 274). Gear shift indicator6 / Gear position indi- symbols in the centre of the information dis-
cator7. See also Gear shift indicator* play, illuminate in key position II or when the
(p. 270), Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* engine is started. When the engine has
(p. 270) or Automatic gearbox - started, all the symbols should go out except
Powershift* (p. 274). the parking brake symbol, which only goes
out when the brake is disengaged.
Indicator and warning symbols If the engine does not start or if the function- 03
ality check is carried out in key position II
then all symbols go out within a few seconds
except the symbol for faults in the car's emis-
sions system and the symbol for low oil pres-
sure.

Gauges and indicators, theme "Performance". Related information


Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to • Combined instrument panel (p. 62)
only one white marking5, the yellow indi- • Combined instrument panel - meaning of
cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank indicator symbols (p. 67)
is illuminated. See also Trip computer - • Combined instrument cluster - meaning
supplementary information (p. 119) and of warning symbols (p. 69)
Filling up with fuel (p. 295). Indicator and warning symbols, digital instrument
panel. • Analogue combined instrument panel -
Temperature gauge for engine coolant overview (p. 62)
Indicator symbols
Speedometer
Indicator and warning symbols
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
Warning symbols8
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm).

5
When the display's message Distance to empty fuel tank: starts to show ----, the marking becomes red.
6 Manual gearbox.
7 Automatic gearbox.
8 Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via display text. For
more information, see Engine oil - general (p. 352).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 65


03 Instruments and controls

Eco guide & Power guide* Instantaneous value


Eco guide and Power guide are two com- The instantaneous value is shown here - the
bined instrument panel (p. 62) instruments higher the reading on the scale, the better.
which help the driver to drive the car with The instantaneous value is calculated based
optimum driving economy. on speed, engine speed, engine power uti-
The car also stores statistics of journeys lised plus use of the foot brake.
made, which can be viewed in the form of a Optimum speed (50-80 km/h) and low engine
block diagram; see Trip computer - trip statis- speeds are encouraged. The pointers fall dur-
03 tics* (p. 120). ing acceleration and braking.
Eco guide Very low instantaneous values illuminate the
This instrument provides an indication of how red zone on the meter (with a short delay),
economically the car is being driven. which means poor driving economy and Available engine power
hence should be avoided.
To view this function, select the theme "Eco";
Average value Engine power utilised
see Digital combined instrument panel - over-
view (p. 63). The average value slowly follows the instanta- Available engine power
neous value and describes how the car has The smaller, upper pointer shows the availa-
been driven most recently. The higher the
ble engine power9. The higher the reading on
pointers on the scale, the better the economy
the scale, the more power is available in the
achieved by the driver.
current gear.
Power guide Engine power utilised
This instrument shows the relationship The larger, lower pointer shows the engine
between how much power (Power) is being power utilised9. The higher the reading on the
taken from the engine and how much power scale, the more power is being taken from the
is available. engine.
To view this function, select the theme A large gap between the two pointers indi-
"Performance"; see Digital combined instru- cates a large power reserve.
ment panel - overview (p. 63).
Instantaneous value

Average value

9 Power is dependent on engine speed.

66 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


03 Instruments and controls

Combined instrument panel - Symbol Specification continues to work, but without the ABS func-
meaning of indicator symbols tion.
The indicator symbols alert the driver that a Main beam On 1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off
function is activated, that the system is oper- the engine.
ating, or that an error or failure has occurred. Left-hand direction indicator
2. Restart the engine.
Indicator symbols 3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to
Right-hand direction indicator
Symbol Specification a workshop to have the ABS system
checked. Volvo recommends that you 03
ABL fault Eco- function on, see ECO* seek assistance from an authorised Volvo
(p. 286) workshop.
Emissions system Start/Stop, the engine auto- Rear fog lamp on
stopped; see Start/Stop* - This symbol illuminates when the rear fog
ABS fault function and operation (p. 278) lamp is switched on. There is only one rear
fog lamp - it is located on the driver's side.
Tyre pressure system , see
Rear fog lamp on Tyre pressure monitoring* Stability system
(p. 324) A flashing symbol indicates that the stability
Stability system, see Electronic system is operating. If the symbol illuminates
stability control (ESC) - general with constant glow then there is a fault in the
ABL fault system.
(p. 184) The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in
the ABL function (Active Bending Lights). Stability system, sport mode
Stability system, sport mode, Sport mode allows for a more active driving
see Electronic stability control Emissions system experience. The system then detects whether
(ESC) - operation (p. 185) If the symbol illuminates after the engine has the accelerator pedal, steering wheel move-
been started then it may be due to a fault in ments and cornering are more active than in
Engine preheater (diesel) the car's emissions system. Drive to a work- normal driving and then allows controlled
shop for checking. Volvo recommends that skidding of the rear section up to a certain
Low level in fuel tank you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo level before it intervenes and stabilises the
workshop. car. The symbol illuminates when the sport
Information, read display text ABS fault mode is activated.
If this symbol illuminates then the system is
not working. The car's regular brake system

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 67


03 Instruments and controls
||
Engine preheater (diesel) Eco function on If the tailgate is not closed properly then the
This symbol illuminates during engine pre- This symbol illuminates when the Eco func- information symbol illuminates together with
heating. Preheating mostly takes place due to tion is activated. an explanatory image in the information dis-
low temperature. play. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as
Start/Stop
possible and close the tailgate.
Low level in fuel tank The symbol shines when the engine is auto-
When the symbol illuminates the level in the stopped. Related information
fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible. Tyre pressure system • Combined instrument panel (p. 62)
Information, read display text The symbol illuminates in the event of low • Combined instrument cluster - meaning
03 When one of the car's systems does not tyre pressure, or if a fault arises in the tyre of warning symbols (p. 69)
behave as intended, this information symbol pressure system.
• Analogue combined instrument panel -
illuminates and a text appears on the informa- Reminder – doors not closed overview (p. 62)
tion display. The message text is cleared with If one of the doors is not closed properly then
the OK button, see Menu navigation - com- • Digital combined instrument panel - over-
the information or warning symbol illuminates view (p. 63)
bined instrument panel (p. 106), or it disap- together with an explanatory image in the
pears automatically after a time (time information display. Stop the car in a safe
depending on which function is indicated). place as soon as possible and close the door
The information symbol can also illuminate in that is open.
conjunction with other symbols.
If the car is driven at a speed lower
NOTE than approx. 7 km/h then the informa-
tion symbol illuminates.
When a service message is shown, the
symbol and message are cleared using the If the car is driven at a speed higher
OK button, or disappear automatically than approx. 7 km/h then the warning
after a time. symbol illuminates.
If the bonnet10 is not closed properly then the
Main beam On warning symbol illuminates together with an
The symbol illuminates when main beam is on explanatory image in the information display.
and with main beam flash. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possi-
Left/right-hand direction indicator ble and close the bonnet.
Both direction indicator symbols flash when
the hazard warning flashers are used.

10 Only cars with alarm*.

68 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


03 Instruments and controls

Combined instrument cluster - Low oil pressure Fault in brake system


meaning of warning symbols If this symbol illuminates during driving then If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level
The warning symbols alert the driver that an the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place
important function is activated, or that a seri- engine immediately and check the engine oil and check the level in the brake fluid reser-
ous error or a serious failure has occurred. level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illumi- voir; see Brake and clutch fluid - level
nates and the oil level is normal, contact a (p. 356).
Warning symbols workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek
If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at
Symbol Specification assistance from an authorised Volvo work-
the same time, there may be a fault in the
shop.
brake force distribution system. 03
Low oil pressureA Parking brake applied
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off
This symbol illuminates with a constant glow
the engine.
Parking brake applied, digital when the parking brake is applied. The sym-
instrument panel bol is illuminated during application. For more 2. Restart the engine.
information, see Parking brake (p. 290).
Parking brake applied, ana- • If both symbols extinguish, continue
logue instrument panel Airbags – SRS driving.
If this symbol remains illuminated or illumi- • If the symbols remain illuminated,
Airbags – SRS nates while driving, it means a fault has been check the level in the brake fluid reser-
detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or voir; see Brake and clutch fluid - level
Seatbelt reminder IC systems. Drive immediately to a workshop (p. 356). If the brake fluid level is nor-
to have the system checked. Volvo recom- mal but the symbols are still illumi-
mends that you seek assistance from an nated, the car can be driven, with great
Alternator not charging authorised Volvo workshop. care, to a workshop to have the brake
system checked. Volvo recommends
Seatbelt reminder
Fault in brake system that you seek assistance from an
This symbol flashes if someone in a front seat
authorised Volvo workshop.
has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in
Warning a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.
Alternator not charging
A Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil This symbol illuminates during driving if a
pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for
low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via fault has occurred in the electrical system.
display text. For more information, see Engine oil - general
(p. 352). Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you
seek assistance from an authorised Volvo
workshop.

}}

69
03 Instruments and controls
||
WARNING 2. Read the information on the information Related information
display. Implement the action in accord- • Combined instrument panel (p. 62)
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in ance with the message in the display.
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur- • Combined instrument panel - meaning of
Clear the message using the OK button. indicator symbols (p. 67)
ther before topping up the brake fluid.
Reminder – doors not closed • Analogue combined instrument panel -
The loss of brake fluid must be investiga-
ted by a workshop. Volvo recommends If one of the doors is not closed properly then overview (p. 62)
that you contact an authorised Volvo the information or warning symbol illuminates
• Digital combined instrument panel - over-
workshop. together with an explanatory image in the view (p. 63)
03 information display. Stop the car in a safe
place as soon as possible and close the door
WARNING that is open.
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at If the car is driven at a speed lower
the same time, there is a risk that the rear
than approx. 7 km/h then the informa-
end will skid during heavy braking.
tion symbol illuminates.

Warning If the car is driven at a speed higher


than approx. 7 km/h then the warning
The red warning symbol illuminates when a
symbol illuminates.
fault has been indicated which could affect
the safety and/or driveability of the car. An If the bonnet11 is not closed properly then the
explanatory text is shown on the information warning symbol illuminates together with an
display at the same time. The symbol remains explanatory image in the information display.
visible until the fault has been rectified but the Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possi-
text message can be cleared with the OK ble and close the bonnet.
button; see Menu navigation - combined
If the tailgate is not closed properly then the
instrument panel (p. 106). The warning sym-
information symbol illuminates together with
bol can also illuminate in conjunction with
an explanatory image in the information dis-
other symbols.
play. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as
Action: possible and close the tailgate.
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car
further.

11 Only cars with alarm*.

70 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


03 Instruments and controls

Outside temperature gauge Trip meter Clock


The display for the outside temperature gauge The trip meter display appears in the com- The clock display appears in the combined
appears in the combined instrument panel. bined instrument panel. instrument panel.

03

Display for outside temperature gauge, Trip meter, digital instrument. Clock, digital instrument panel.
digital instrument panel Display for trip meter12 Display for showing the time13
Display for outside temperature gauge,
The two trip meters T1 and T2 are used for Set the clock
analogue instrument panel
measuring short distances. The distance is The clock can be adjusted in the menu sys-
When the temperature lies between +2 °C to shown in the display. tem MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 109).
-5 °C a snowflake symbol illuminates in the
display. This warns of icy roads. If the car has Turn the left stalk switch thumbwheel to show
the required meter. Related information
been stationary then the gauge may show a • Combined instrument panel (p. 62)
reading that is too high. A long press (until the change occurs) on the
left-hand stalk switch's RESET button resets
Related information the trip meter shown. For more information,
• Combined instrument panel (p. 62) see Trip computer - supplementary informa-
tion (p. 119).

Related information
• Combined instrument panel (p. 62)

12 Display appearance may differ depending on instrument variant.

71
03 Instruments and controls

Combined instrument panel - license The offer is valid for a period of at least three MIT License: http://opensource.org/licenses/
agreement (3) years from the date of the distribution of mit-license.html
A license is an agreement for the right to this product by VCC / or for as long as VCC
offers spare parts or customer support.
• Lua
operate a certain activity or the right to use
someone else's entitlement according to the Portions of this product uses software
terms and conditions in the agreement. The copyrighted © 2007 The FreeType Project
following text is Volvo's agreement with the (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
manufacturer/developer.
Portions of this product uses software with
03 Copyright © 1994–2013 Lua.org, PUC-Rio
Combined Instrument Panel Software
Open Source Software Notice (http://www.lua.org/)
This product uses certain free / open source
and other software originating from third
parties, that is subject to the GNU Lesser
General Public License version 2 (LGPLv2),
The FreeType Project License ("FreeType
License") and other different and/or additional
copy right licenses, disclaimers and notices.
This product includes software under
The links to access the exact terms of
following licenses:
LGPLv2, and the other open source software
licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and LGPL v2.1: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-
notices are provided to you below. Please licenses/lgpl-2.1.html
refer to the exact terms of the relevant
• GNU FriBidi
License, regarding your rights under said
licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers • DevIL
to provide the source code of said free/open The FreeType Project License: http://
source software to you for a charge covering git.savannah.gnu.org/cgit/freetype/
the cost of performing such distribution, such freetype2.git/tree/docs/FTL.TXT
as the cost of media, shipping and handling,
• FreeType 2
upon written request. Please contact your
nearest Volvo Dealer.

13 The time is shown in the middle of the instrument panel when an analogue instrument panel is fitted.

72
03 Instruments and controls

Symbols in the display Symbol Specification See Control symbols in the combined
There are a variety of different symbols in the instrument panel
display in the car. The symbols are divided Low oil pressure (p. 69)
Symbol Specification See
into warning, indicator and information sym-
bols. Parking brake (p. 69), ABL fault* (p. 67),
applied, digital (p. 290) (p. 90)
Shown below are the most common symbols
instrument panel
with their meanings and a reference to where Emissions sys- (p. 67)
in the manual further information can be Parking brake (p. 69) tem
found. 03
applied, analogue
ABS fault (p. 67),
instrument panel
- Red warning symbol, illuminates (p. 288)
when a fault has been indicated which could Airbags – SRS (p. 30),
affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. Rear fog lamp (p. 67),
(p. 69)
An explanatory text is shown on the informa- on (p. 90)
tion display in the combined instrument panel Seatbelt reminder (p. 26),
Stability system, (p. 67),
at the same time. (p. 69)
ESC (Electronic (p. 186),
- When one of the car's systems does Alternator not (p. 69) Stability Con- (p. 307)
not behave as intended, this information sym- charging trol), Trailer sta-
bol illuminates, and a text appears on the bility assist*
information display in the combined instru- Fault in brake (p. 69),
system (p. 288) Stability system, (p. 67),
ment panel. The yellow information symbol
sport mode (p. 186)
can also illuminate in conjunction with other Warning, safety (p. 30),
symbols. mode (p. 41), Engine pre- (p. 67)
(p. 69) heater (diesel)
Warning symbols in the combined
instrument panel Low level in fuel (p. 67),
tank (p. 140)

Information, (p. 67)


read display text

Main beam On (p. 67),


(p. 87)

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 73


03 Instruments and controls
||
Symbol Specification See Symbol Specification See Symbol Specification See
Left-hand direc- (p. 67) Adaptive cruise (p. 212) Distance warning* (p. 216),
tion indicators control* (Distance Alert), (p. 223),
City SafetyTM, (p. 232)
Right-hand (p. 67) Adaptive cruise (p. 203), Collision warning
direction indica- control* (p. 212) system*, Auto-
tors brake*
Adaptive cruise (p. 212),
03 Start/Stop*, (p. 67), control*, Distance (p. 214) Engine block and (p. 140)
engine auto- (p. 278) Warning* (Dis- passenger com-
stopped tance Alert) partment heater*
ECO function* (p. 67), Adaptive cruise (p. 202)
Engine block (p. 140)
on (p. 286) control*
heater and pas-
Tyre pressure (p. 67), Tyre Cruise control* (p. 194) senger compart-
system* pressure ment heater*
monitoring* Service required
Speed limiter (p. 190)
(p. 324)
Activated timer* (p. 140)
Information symbols in the combined Radar sensor* (p. 212),
(p. 216),
instrument panel
(p. 232)
Symbol Specification See Activated timer* (p. 140)
Start/Stop* (p. 284)
Main beam with (p. 88)
auto dimming -
AHB* ABL system* (p. 90)
Start/Stop* (p. 284)
Camera sensor*, (p. 88),
Laser sensor* (p. 223),
(p. 232), Low battery (p. 140)
(p. 235), Start/Stop* (p. 284)
(p. 240)

74 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


03 Instruments and controls

Symbol Specification See Symbol Specification See Volvo Sensus


Volvo Sensus is the heart of the personal
Park Assist Pilot - (p. 249) Recorded speed (p. 188) Volvo experience and connects you with the
PAP* information* car and outside world. Sensus provides infor-
mation, entertainment and assistance when it
is needed. Sensus consists of intuitive func-
Rain sensor* (p. 98) Measuring the oil (p. 353) tions that both enhance the car journey and
level simplifies ownership of the car.
Lane assistance* (p. 238) 03
Information symbols in the roof console
display
Driver Alert Sys- (p. 240)
tem*, Lane assis-
Symbol Specification See
tance* Seatbelt reminder (p. 29)
Driver Alert Sys- (p. 235),
tem*, Lane assis- (p. 240)
tance* Airbag, passenger (p. 34)
An intuitive navigation structure makes it pos-
seat, activated
Driver Alert Sys- (p. 234) sible to receive relevant support, information
tem*, Time for a and entertainment when it is necessary, with-
break Airbag, passenger (p. 34) out distracting the driver.
seat, deactivated Sensus covers all the car's solutions that
Driver Alert Sys- (p. 235)
tem*, Time for a enable connection* to the outside world and
break provides you with intuitive control over all the
Related information car's capabilities.
Gear shift indica- (p. 270) • Combined instrument panel - meaning of Volvo Sensus combines and presents many
tor indicator symbols (p. 67)
functions in several of the car's systems on
• Combined instrument cluster - meaning the centre console's display screen. With
of warning symbols (p. 69) Volvo Sensus the car can be personalised by
Gear positions (p. 270)
• Messages - handling (p. 108) means of an intuitive user interface. Settings

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 75


03 Instruments and controls
||
can be made in Car settings, Audio and Overview Key positions
media, Climate control, etc. The remote control key can be used to set the
With the centre console buttons and controls vehicle's electrical system in different modes/
or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad* levels so that different functions are available;
functions can be activated or deactivated and see Key positions - functions at different lev-
many different settings can be made. els (p. 77).
With a press on MY CAR all settings related
to the driving and control of the car are pre-
03 sented, such as City Safety, locks and alarm,
automatic fan speed, setting the clock, etc.
With a press on the respective function
RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, *, NAV* and CAM*
other sources, systems and functions can be Control panel in centre console. The figure is
schematic - the number of functions and layout
activated, e.g. AM, FM, CD, DVD*, TV*, of the buttons both vary, depending on the
Bluetooth®*, navigation* and park assist cam- equipment selected and the market.
era*. Navigation* - NAV, see separate supple-
For more information about all functions/ ment (Sensus Navigation).
systems, see the relevant section in the Audio and media - RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, Ignition switch with remote control key extrac-
owner's manual or its supplement. ted/inserted.
see separate supplement (Sensus Info-
tainment).
NOTE
Function settings - MY CAR, see MY
CAR (p. 109). For cars with the Keyless* function the key
does not need to be inserted into the igni-
Internet-connected car - *, see sepa- tion switch but can be stored in e.g. a
rate supplement (Sensus Infotainment). pocket. For more information on Keyless
functions, see Keyless drive* (p. 167).
Climate control system (p. 122).

76 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


03 Instruments and controls

Insert the key Key positions - functions at different Level Functions


1. Hold the end of the remote control key levels
with the detachable key blade and insert To enable the use of a limited number of 0 Odometer, clock and temperature
the key in the ignition switch. functions with the engine switched off, the gauge are illuminated.
2. Then press the key in the lock up to its car's electrical system can be set in 3 differ- Electrically operated seats can be
end position. ent levels - 0, I and II - with the remote con- adjusted.
trol key. This owner's manual describes these
IMPORTANT levels throughout using the denomination The audio system can be used for
"key positions". a limited time - see the Sensus
Foreign objects in the ignition switch can 03
Infotainment supplement.
impair the function or destroy the lock. The following table shows the functions avail-
Do not press in the remote control key able in each key position/level. I Sun visor for glass roof, power
incorrectly turned - Hold the end with the windows, 12 V socket in the pas-
detachable key blade; see Detachable key senger compartment, RTI, phone,
blade - detaching/attaching (p. 165). ventilation fan and windscreen
wipers can be used.
Withdraw the key II The headlamps come on.
Push the remote control key, allow it to eject,
then pull it out from the ignition switch. Warning/indicator lamps illumi-
nate for 5 seconds.
Several other systems are acti-
vated. However, electric heating
in seat cushions and the rear win-
dow can only be activated after
starting the engine.
This key position consumes a
lot of current from the starter
battery and should therefore be
avoided!

}}

77
03 Instruments and controls
||
Selecting key position/level Towing Seats, front
• Key position 0 - Unlock the car - This For important information about the remote The car's front seats have different setting
means that the car's electrical system is control key during towing, see Towing options for optimum seating comfort.
at level 0. (p. 308).

NOTE Related information


• Key positions (p. 76)
To reach level I or II without starting the
engine - do not depress the brake/clutch
03 pedal when these key positions are due to
be selected.

• Key position I - With the remote control


key fully inserted into the ignition switch14
- Briefly press START/STOP ENGINE.
• Key position II - With the remote control
key fully inserted into the ignition switch14
To adjust lumbar support*, turn the
- Give a long15 press on START/STOP
ENGINE. wheel16.

• Back to key position 0 - To return to key Forward/backward: lift the handle to


position 0 from position II and I - Briefly adjust the distance to the steering wheel
press on START/STOP ENGINE. and pedals. Check that the seat is locked
after adjusting position.
Audio system To raise/lower the front edge of seat
For information on audio system functions cushion*, pump up/down.
with remote control key removed, see the
Sensus Infotainment supplement. Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.

Raise/lower the seat*, pump up/down.


Starting and stopping the engine
For information about starting/switching off Control panel for power seat*, see Seats,
the engine, see Starting the engine (p. 266). front - electrically operated (p. 80).

14 Not required for cars with the Keyless* function.


15 Approx. 2 seconds.
16 Also applies to electrically operated seat.

78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


03 Instruments and controls

WARNING Lowering the passenger seat backrest* WARNING


Adjust the position of the driver's seat Grasp the backrest and make sure that it
before setting off, never while driving. is properly locked after being folded up in
Make sure that the seat is in locked posi- order to avoid personal injury in the event
tion in order to avoid personal injury in the of sudden braking or an accident.
event of heavy braking or an accident.
Related information
Adjusting the front seat head restraints • Seats, front - electrically operated
(p. 80) 03
• Seats, rear (p. 81)

The passenger seat backrest can be folded


forward to make room for long loads.
Move the seat as far back/down as possi-
ble.
Adjust the backrest to an upright position.

The height of the head restraints can be Lift the catches on the rear of the back-
adjusted. rest and fold it forward.
Adjust the head restraint based on the per- 4. Push the seat forward so that the head
son's height so that the whole of the back of restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.
the head is covered if possible. Raising takes place in reverse order.
To adjust the height, the button (see illustra-
tion) must be pressed while the restraint is WARNING
moved up or down.
Do not use the seat behind the passenger
The head restraint can be adjusted in three seat, or the rear centre seat, when the
different positions. passenger seat's backrest is lowered.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79


03 Instruments and controls

Seats, front - electrically operated wait a short time before adjusting the seat Store setting
The car's front seats have different setting again. Memory button
options for optimum seating comfort. The Only one movement (forward/back/up/down) Memory button
power seat can be moved forward/backward can be made at a time.
and up/down. The front edge of the seat Memory button
cushion can be raised/lowered. The backrest Preparations
angle can be changed. The seat can be adjusted for a certain time Button for storing settings
after unlocking the door with the remote con-
Electrically operated seat* trol key without the key in the ignition switch. 1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
03
Seat adjustment is normally made in key 2. Press and hold button M while pressing
position I and can always be made when the button 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously. Hold the
engine is running. buttons depressed until the acoustic sig-
nal is heard and the text is shown the
Seat with memory function* combined instrument panel.
The seat must be adjusted again before a
new memory can be set.

Using a stored setting


Press one of the memory buttons 1-3 until the
seat and the door mirrors stop. If the button
is released, the movement of the seat and
Front edge of seat cushion up/down door mirrors will be interrupted.
Raise/lower seat Key memory* in remote control key
All remote control keys can be used by differ-
Seat, forward/backward
ent drivers to store the settings for the driv-
Backrest rake The memory function stores settings for the er's seat and door mirrors17, see Remote
seat and the door mirrors. control key - personalisation* (p. 158).
The power seats have overload protection
which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an
object. If this should happen, set the car's
electrical system in key position I or 0 and

17 Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and retractable power door mirrors.

80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


03 Instruments and controls

Emergency stop Seats, rear WARNING


If the seat accidentally begins to move, press The rear seat backrest and the outer seat
one of the setting buttons for the seat or The centre seat head restraint must be in
head restraints can be folded. The centre seat its lowest position when the centre seat is
memory buttons in order to stop the seat. head restraint can be adjusted to suit the not used. When the centre seat is used,
height of the passenger. the head restraint must be correctly
WARNING adjusted to the height of the passenger so
Head restraint, centre seat, rear that it covers the whole of the back of the
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children head if possible.
do not play with the controls. Check that
there are no objects in front of, behind or 03
under the seat during adjustment. Make Manual lowering of the outer head
sure that none of the passengers in the restraints, rear seat
rear seat is in danger of becoming trap-
ped.

Heated seats
For heated seats, see Heated front seats*
(p. 130) and Heated rear seat* (p. 130).

Related information
• Seats, front (p. 78)
Adjust the head restraint according to pas-
• Seats, rear (p. 81) senger height so that the whole of the back of
the head is covered if possible. Slide it up as
required.
To lower the head restraint again, the button Pull the locking handle closest to the head
(see illustration) must be pressed while the restraint to fold the head restraint forward.
restraint is carefully moved down.
The head restraint is moved back manually.
The head restraint can be adjusted in five dif-
ferent positions. WARNING
The head restraint must be in locked posi-
tion after being folded up.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 81


03 Instruments and controls
||
Lowering the rear seat backrest NOTE
When the backrest has been raised, the
IMPORTANT red indicator should no longer be showing.
When the backrest is to be folded, the rear If it is still showing then the backrest is not
seat cup holder must not be open and locked in place.
there must be no objects in the rear seat.
Nor may the seat belts be connected. Oth-
erwise there is a risk of damage to the rear WARNING
seat upholstery. Check that the backrests and head
03
restraints in the rear seat are locked prop-
If the right-hand section is being lowered
erly after being folded up.
NOTE - release and adjust head restraint for the
The front seats may need to be pushed centre seat, see the earlier section "Head
restraint, centre seat, rear". Related information
forwards, and/or the backrests adjusted
upwards, in order that the rear backrests • Seats, front (p. 78)
The outer head restraints are lowered
can be fully folded forward. automatically when the backrests are • Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 80)
lowered. Pull up the backrest's locking
• Both sections can be folded separately. handle while folding the backrest for-
• If the entire backrest is to be folded then ward at the same time. A red indicator on
the different sections should be folded the lock catch shows that the back-
separately. rest is no longer locked in place.

NOTE
When the backrests have been lowered
the head restraints must be moved for-
ward slightly so as not to make contact
with the seat cushion.

Raising takes place in reverse order.

82
03 Instruments and controls

Steering wheel 3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering Keypads* and paddles*
The steering wheel can be adjusted in differ- wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press
ent positions and has controls for horn and the steering wheel lightly at the same time
cruise control, as well as menu, audio and as you push the lever back.
phone control.
WARNING
Adjusting
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before
driving away.
03
With speed related power steering* the level
of steering force can be adjusted, see Adjust-
able steering force (p. 259).
Keypads and paddles in the steering wheel.
Cruise control* (p. 194)* and Adaptive
cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)*.
Paddle for manual gear changing in an
automatic gearbox, see Automatic gear-
Adjusting the steering wheel. box - Geartronic* (p. 270).
Lever - releasing the steering wheel Audio and phone control, see supple-
ment, Sensus Infotainment.
Possible steering wheel positions
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and depth:
1. Push the lever forwards to release the
steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 83


03 Instruments and controls
||
Horn Light switches Knob positions
The headlamp control activates and adjusts Posi- Specification
the external lighting. It is also used to adjust tion
display and instrument lighting and ambience
lights (p. 93). Daytime running lightsA when
the car's electrical system is in
Overview, light switches key position II or the engine is
running.
03 Main beam flash can be used.

Daytime running lights, side


marker lamps rear and position/
parking lamps when the car's
Horn. electrical system is in key posi-
Press the centre of the steering wheel to sig- tion II or the engine is running.
nal. Side marker lamps rear and
position/parking lamps when
the car is parked.
Overview, light switches. Main beam flash can be used.
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and
instrument lighting as well as ambience Daytime running lights, side
lights* marker lamps rear and position/
parking lamps in daylight when
Button for rear fog lamp the car's electrical system is in
Knob for daytime running lights and park- key position II or the engine is
ing lamps running.

Thumbwheel18 for headlamp levelling Dipped beam, side marker


lamps rear and position/parking
lamps in weak daylight or dark-
ness or when the rear fog lamp

18 Not available for cars equipped with active Xenon headlamps*.

84 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


03 Instruments and controls

Posi- Specification WARNING


tion The car's audio system is not able to
is activated. On cars with active determine when daylight is too weak or
Xenon headlamps* (p. 90) the sufficiently strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in
all situations.
daytime running light lamps are
switched on with reduced The driver is always responsible for ensur-
brightness. ing that the car is driven with a beam pat-
tern suitable for the traffic situation and in
The tunnel detection (p. 87)* accordance with applicable traffic regula- 03
function is activated. tions.
The Active main beam (p. 88)*
function can be used. Instrument lighting
Thumbwheel positions for different load cases.
Different display and instrument lighting is
Main beam can be activated Only driver
switched on depending on key position; see
when dipped beam is switched
Key positions - functions at different levels
on. Driver and passenger in the front passen-
(p. 77).
ger seat
Main beam flash can be used.
The display lighting is automatically subdued Occupants in all seats
Dipped beam, side marker in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the
lamps rear and position/parking thumbwheel. Occupants in all seats and maximum load
lamps. in the cargo area
The intensity of the instrument lighting is
Main beam can be activated. adjusted with the thumbwheel. Driver and maximum load in the cargo
area
Main beam flash can be used. Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical align- Cars with active Xenon headlamps* have
On cars with active Xenon ment of the headlamp beam, which could automatic headlamp levelling and are there-
headlamps the daytime running dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by fore not equipped with the thumbwheel.
light lamps are switched on adjusting the height of the beam. Lower the
with reduced brightness. Related information
beam if the car is heavily laden.
• Position/parking lamps (p. 86)
A Fitted in or under the front bumper. 1. Leave the engine running, or have the • Daytime running lights (p. 86)
car's electrical system in key position I.
Volvo recommends that mode is used • Main/dipped beam (p. 87)
when the car is driven. 2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/
lower beam alignment.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 85


03 Instruments and controls

Position/parking lamps Daytime running lights On cars with halogen headlamps the daytime
Position/parking lamps are switched on with running light lamps are switched off when
With the knob for headlamp control in
the headlamp control knob. main or dipped beam is activated.
position, and the car's electrical system in key
position II or the engine running, the daytime On cars with active Xenon headlamps
running lights are activated automatically in (p. 90) the daytime running light lamps are
daylight. switched on with reduced brightness when
main or dipped beam is activated.
Daytime running lights during the day.
03 DRL WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannot
determine in all situations when daylight is
too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist
and rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensur-
ing that the car is driven with the correct
Knob for headlamp control in the position for beam pattern for the traffic situation and in
position/parking lamps. accordance with applicable traffic regula-
tions.
Turn the knob to the position for (num-
ber plate lighting is switched on at the same
time).
Knob for headlamp control in AUTO position.
If the car's electrical system is in key position
II or the engine is running then the daytime With the knob for headlamp control in
running lights also switch on. position the daytime running lights (Daytime
When it is dark outside and the tailgate is Running Lights - DRL) are activated automati-
opened the rear position/parking lamps illumi- cally when the car is driven in daylight. A light
nate to alert traffic behind. This takes place sensor on the top of the instrument panel
irrespective of what position the knob is in or changes from daytime running lights to
what key position the car's electrical system dipped beam at twilight or when daylight
is in. becomes too weak. Switching to dipped
beam also takes place when the rear fog
Related information lamps are activated.
• Light switches (p. 84)

86
03 Instruments and controls

Tunnel detection* Main/dipped beam flash. Main beam comes on until the stalk
Tunnel detection changes the lighting from switch is released.
daytime running lights to dipped beam when
Main beam
the car is driven into a tunnel. Approx. 20 sec-
Main beam can be activated when the knob
onds after the car has left the tunnel, the light-
is in position 19 or . Activate/deac-
ing returns to daytime running lights.
tivate main beam by moving the stalk switch
The tunnel detection function is available in towards the steering wheel to the end posi-
cars with rain sensor*. The sensor detects the tion and then releasing. Alternatively, the
entrance to a tunnel and resets the lighting 03
main beam can be deactivated by a light
from daytime running lights to dipped beam. press of the stalk switch toward the steering
Approx. 20 seconds after the car has left the wheel.
tunnel, the lighting returns to daytime running
When main beam has been activated the
lights. If the car is driven into another tunnel
within this time period then dipped beam is symbol illuminates in the combined
Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control.
kept switched on. This prevents frequent instrument panel.
Position for main beam flash
changes to the car's beam pattern.
Related information
Note that the headlamp control's knob must Position for main beam • Active Xenon headlamps* (p. 90)
remain in position for tunnel detection
Dipped beam • Active main beam* (p. 88)
to work. • Light switches (p. 84)
With the knob in position, dipped beam
Related information is activated automatically at dusk or when • Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern
• Main/dipped beam (p. 87) daylight becomes too weak. Dipped beam is (p. 95)
• Light switches (p. 84) also activated automatically when the rear fog • Tunnel detection* (p. 87)
lamp is activated.
With the knob in position, dipped beam
is always switched on when the engine is run-
ning or when key position II is active.

Main beam flash


Move the stalk switch gently towards the
steering wheel to the position for main beam

19 When dipped beam is activated.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 87


03 Instruments and controls

Active main beam* When AHB is activated the symbol


Active main beam function detects the head- turns white in the instrument's information
lamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear display.
lights of vehicles in front, and switches the When main beam is activated, the symbol
lighting from main beam to dipped beam. The shines blue.
lighting returns to main beam when the
incoming light has stopped.

Active main beam - AHB


03
Active main beam (Active High Beam - AHB)
is a function which uses a camera sensor at
the top edge of the windscreen to detect the
headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control in
rear lights of vehicles in front, and then AUTO position.
switches from main beam to dipped beam. The function can start while driving in the
The function can also take streetlights into dark when the car's speed is 20 km/h or
account. higher.
The lighting returns to main beam about a Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the left-
second after the camera sensor no longer hand stalk switch towards the steering wheel
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming to the end position and then releasing. Deac-
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front. tivation when main beam is on means that the
Activating/deactivating lights are reset directly to dipped beam.
AHB can be activated when the headlamp Car with analogue combined instrument
control's knob is in position (provided panel
that the function has not been deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR When AHB is activated the symbol illu-
(p. 109)). minates in the instrument's information dis-
play.
When main beam has been switched on the
symbol also illuminates in the com-
bined instrument panel.
Car with digital combined instrument panel

88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


03 Instruments and controls

Manual operation WARNING IMPORTANT


AHB is an aid for using the optimum beam Examples of when manual switching
NOTE pattern when conditions are favourable. between main and dipped beam may be
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the required:
The driver always bears responsibility for
camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist manually switching between main and • In heavy rain or dense fog
and dirt. dipped beam when traffic situations or
weather conditions so require. • In freezing rain
Do not stick or attach anything to the
windscreen in front of the camera sensor • In snow flurries or slush
as this may reduce effectiveness or cause • In moonlight 03
one or more of the systems dependent on
the camera to stop working. • When driving in poorly lit built-up
areas

If the message Active main beam


• When the traffic ahead has weak light-
ing
Temporary unavailable Switch manually is
shown in the combined instrument panel's • If there are pedestrians on or beside
information display then you have to switch the road
manually between main and dipped beam. • If there are highly reflective objects
However, the knob for headlamp control can such as signs in the vicinity of the road
still remain in position . The same • When the lighting from oncoming traf-
applies if the message Windscreen sensors fic is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier
blocked See manual and the symbol • When there is traffic on connecting
are shown. The symbol goes out when roads
these messages are shown. • On the brow of a hill or in a hollow
AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in • In sharp bends.
situations with dense fog or heavy rain. When
AHB becomes available again, or the wind- For more information on the limitations of the
screen sensors are no longer blocked, the camera sensor, see Collision warning system*
message goes out and the symbol illu- - camera sensor limitations (p. 230).
minates.
Related information
• Main/dipped beam (p. 87)
• Light switches (p. 84)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 89


03 Instruments and controls

Active Xenon headlamps* minates in the combined instrument panel at Rear fog lamp
Active Xenon headlamps are designed to pro- the same time as the information display When visibility is reduced by fog the rear fog
vide maximum illumination in bends and junc- shows an explanatory text and a further illu- lamp can be used so that other road users
tions and so provide increased safety. minated symbol. shall notice vehicles in front at an early stage.

Active Xenon headlamps ABL Symbol Message Specification


Headlamp The system is
system disengaged. Visit
03
malfunc- a workshop if
tion Serv- the message
ice remains. Volvo
required recommends
that you contact
an authorised
Volvo workshop.

The function is only active in twilight or dark- Button for rear fog lamp.
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) ness and only when the car is moving. The rear fog lamp consists of one rear lamp
and activated (right) respectively.
The function20 can be deactivated/activated and can only be switched on when key posi-
If the car is equipped with active Xenon head- in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR tion II is active or the engine is running and
lamps (Active Bending Lights – ABL) then the (p. 109). the headlamp control's knob is in position
light from the headlamps follows the steering or .
wheel movement in order to provide maxi- Related information
Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog
mum lighting in bends and junctions and so • Main/dipped beam (p. 87)
provide increased safety. lamp indicator symbol in the combined
• Active main beam* (p. 88)
instrument panel and the lamp in the button
The function is activated automatically when • Light switches (p. 84) illuminate when the rear fog lamp is switched
the car is started (provided that it has not
been deactivated in the menu system
• Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern on.
(p. 95)
MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 109)). In the event The rear fog lamp is switched off automati-
of a fault in the function the symbol illu- cally when the engine is switched off or when

20 Activated on delivery from the factory.

90 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


03 Instruments and controls

the headlamp control's knob is turned to Brake lights Hazard warning flashers
position or . The brake light automatically comes on during The hazard warning flashers warn other road
braking. users by means of all of the car's direction
NOTE indicator lamps flashing simultaneously when
The brake light is switched on when the brake this function is activated.
Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps pedal is depressed. In addition, it is switched
vary from country to country. on when one of driving support systems When the hazard warning flashers are acti-
Adaptive cruise control (p. 199), City Safety vated both direction indicator symbols flash in
Related information (p. 217) or Collision warning system (p. 224) the combined instrument panel.
brakes the car. 03
• Light switches (p. 84)
Related information
• Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers
(p. 290)

Button for hazard warning flashers.


Press the button to activate the hazard warn-
ing flashers. Both direction indicator symbols
in the combined instrument panel flash when
the hazard warning flashers are used.
The hazard warning flashers are activated
automatically when the car has been braked
so suddenly that the emergency brake lights
have been activated at a speed below
10 km/h. The hazard warning flashers remain
on when the car has stopped and are deacti-

}}

91
03 Instruments and controls
||
vated automatically when the car is driven off direction indicators The stalk switch remains in its position and is
again or the button is depressed. The car's direction indicators are operated moved back manually, or automatically by the
with the left-hand stalk switch. The direction steering wheel movement.
Related information
indicator lamps flash three times or continu-
• direction indicators (p. 92)
ously, depending on how far up or down the
Direction indicator symbols
• Foot brake - emergency brake lights and For direction indicator symbols, see Com-
stalk switch is moved.
automatic hazard warning flashers bined instrument panel - meaning of indicator
(p. 290) symbols (p. 67).

03 Related information
• Hazard warning flashers (p. 91)

Direction indicators.

Short flash sequence


Move the stalk switch up or down to the
first position and release. The direction
indicator lamps flash three times. The
function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR, see MY
CAR (p. 109).

Continuous flash sequence


Move the stalk switch up or down to the
outer position.

92
03 Instruments and controls

Interior lighting Front reading lamps* Lighting in the front door storage
The passenger compartment lighting is acti- The reading lamps are switched on or off by compartments*
vated/deactivated with the buttons in the con- briefly pressing the relevant button in the roof Lighting in the front door storage compart-
trols above the front seats and the rear seat. console. ments comes on when the engine starts.
Brightness is adjusted by holding the button Glovebox lighting
pressed in.
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off
Rear reading lamps* respectively when the lid is opened or closed.

Vanity mirror lighting 03


The lighting for the vanity mirror (p. 148) is
switched on and off respectively when the
cover is opened or closed.

Lighting in the cargo area


The lighting in the cargo area is switched on
and off respectively when the tailgate is
opened or closed.
Controls in roof console for the front reading
lamps and passenger compartment lighting. Auto function for passenger
Reading lamp, left-hand side compartment lighting
Rear reading lamps. The auto function is activated when the lamp
Passenger compartment lighting (floor
in the AUTO button is lit.
lamps* and ceiling lamps) - On/Off The lamps are switched on or off by briefly
Auto function for passenger compartment pressing the relevant button. The passenger compartment lighting is then
lighting switched on and off as indicated below.
Brightness is adjusted by holding the button
Reading lamp, right-hand side pressed in. The passenger compartment lighting is
switched on and remains on for 30 seconds
All lighting in the passenger compartment can Floor lighting as ambient light* if:
be switched on and off manually within To make the interior brighter while driving the
30 minutes from when: floor lighting can be activated at dimmed • the car is unlocked with the remote con-
trol key or key blade, see Remote control
level.
• the engine has been switched off and the
car's electrical system is in key position 0 Floor lamp intensity can be changed in the
• the car has been unlocked but the engine menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 109).
has not been started.
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93


03 Instruments and controls
||
key - functions (p. 161) or Detachable Home safe light duration Approach light duration
key blade - unlocking doors (p. 165) Home safe lighting consists of dipped beam, Approach lighting consists of parking lamps,
• the engine has been switched off and the parking lamps, lamps in the door mirrors, lamps in the door mirrors, number plate light-
car's electrical system is in key position number plate lighting, interior roof lighting ing, interior roof lighting and floor lighting.
0. and floor lighting.
Approach lighting is switched on with the
Passenger compartment lighting is switched
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept remote control key, see Remote control key -
off when:
switched on to work as home safe lighting functions (p. 161), and is used to switch on
• the engine is started after the car has been locked. the car's lighting at a distance.
03
• the car is locked. 1. Remove the remote control key from the When the function is activated with the
The passenger compartment lighting is ignition switch. remote control, the parking lamps, door mir-
switched on and off respectively when a side ror lamps, number plate lighting, interior roof
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward
door is opened or closed. lighting and floor lighting are switched on.
the steering wheel to the end position and
It remains switched on for two minutes if one release it. The function can be activated The length of time for which the approach
of the doors is open. in the same way as with main beam flash; lighting should be kept on can be set in the
see Main/dipped beam (p. 87). menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 109).
If any lighting is switched on manually and
the car is locked then it will be switched off 3. Get out of the car and lock the door. Related information
automatically after two minutes. • Home safe light duration (p. 94)
When the function is activated, dipped beam,
Mood lights* parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number
When the normal passenger compartment plate lighting, interior roof lighting and floor
lighting is switched off and the engine is run- lighting are switched on.
ning, an LED illuminates in the front and rear The length of time for which the home safe
roof console respectively in order to provide a lighting should be kept on can be set in the
low light and enhance the ambience while menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 109).
driving. The light also makes it easier during
dark periods of the day to see objects in stor- Related information
age compartments, etc. This lighting switches • Approach light duration (p. 94)
off when the engine is switched off. The
intensity and colour of the light can be
changed in the menu system MY CAR, see
MY CAR (p. 109).

94 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


03 Instruments and controls

Headlamps - adjusting headlamp Active Xenon headlamps*


pattern The light pattern does not need to be
The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to adjusted. The headlamp pattern is designed
avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can in such a way that oncoming traffic is not
be set for right or left-hand traffic. dazzled.

Halogen headlamps
The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps
is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens.
The headlamp pattern may not be as good. 03

Masking the headlamps


1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand
drive cars or the C and D templates for
right-hand drive cars, see later section
"Templates for halogen headlamps". The
templates have a scale of 1:2. Use a pho-
G021151

tocopier with a zoom function for exam-


ple, and copy the templates at 200 %:
Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic.
• A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, right
lens)
• B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens)
• C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, right
lens)
• D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left
lens)
2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive
waterproof material and cut it out.
3. Start from the design lines on the head-
G021152

lamp lenses; see the lines in the following


Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic. figure. Position the self-adhesive tem-
plates at the design lines with the help of
the illustration.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 95


03 Instruments and controls
||

03

Upper row: left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.

96
03 Instruments and controls

Templates for halogen headlamps

03

97
03 Instruments and controls

Wipers and washers Intermittent wiping detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of
Wipers and washers clean the windscreen Set the number of sweeps per time the rain sensor can be adjusted using the
and rear window. The headlamps are cleaned unit with the thumbwheel when thumbwheel.
with high-pressure washing. intermittent wiping is selected. When the rain sensor is activated a lamp in
Continuous wiping the button is illuminated and the rain sensor
Windscreen wipers21
The wipers sweep at normal speed. symbol is shown in the combined
instrument panel.

03 The wipers sweep at high speed. Activating and setting the sensitivity
When activating the rain sensor, the car must
be running or the remote control key in posi-
IMPORTANT tion I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk
switch must be in position 0 or in the position
Before activating the wipers during winter for a single sweep.
ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen
in, and that any snow or ice on the wind- Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain
screen is scraped away. sensor button . The windscreen wipers
make one sweep.
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers. IMPORTANT Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to
Rain sensor, On/Off Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers make an extra sweep.
are cleaning the windscreen. The wind- Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sen-
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency screen must be wet when the windscreen
sitivity and downward for lower sensitivity.
wipers are operating.
Windscreen wipers off (An extra sweep is made when the thumb-
Move the stalk switch to position 0 wheel is turned upward.)
Service position wiper blade
to switch off the windscreen wipers. Deactivate
For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades
and replacement of wiper blades, see Car Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch and release to wash (p. 381) and Wiper blades (p. 364). rain sensor button or move the stalk
make one sweep. switch down to another wiper program.
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor automatically starts the wind-
screen wipers based on how much water it

21 For replacing the wiper blades and service position wiper blades, see Wiper blades (p. 364). For filling washer fluid, see Washer fluid - filling (p. 366).

98 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


03 Instruments and controls

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated Washing the windscreen Wiping and washing the rear window
when the remote control key is removed from Move the stalk switch toward the steering
the ignition switch or five minutes after the wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp
engine has been switched off. washers.
The windscreen wipers will make several
IMPORTANT more sweeps and the headlamps are washed
The windscreen wipers could start and be once the stalk switch has been released.
damaged in an automatic car wash.
Switch off the rain sensor while the car is High-pressure headlamp washing* 03
in motion or when the remote control key High-pressure headlamp washing consumes
is in position I or II. The symbol in the a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid,
combined instrument panel and the light in the headlamps are washed automatically at
the button go out. every fifth windscreen wash cycle.
Rear window wiper – intermittent wiping
Washing the headlamps and windows Reduced washing
If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains Rear window wiper – continuous speed
in the reservoir and the message that you
should fill the washer fluid is shown in the Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow
combined instrument panel, then the supply in the illustration above) to initiate rear win-
of washer fluid to the headlamps is switched dow washing and wiping.
off. This is in order to prioritise cleaning the
windscreen and the visibility through it. NOTE
The rear window wiper is equipped with
overheating protection which means that
the motor is switched off if it overheats.
The rear window wiper works again after a
cooling period (30 seconds or longer,
depending on the heat in the motor and
Washing function. the outside temperature).

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 99


03 Instruments and controls
||
Wiper – reversing Power windows WARNING
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen All power windows can be operated using the
wipers are on initiates intermittent rear win- Check that children or other passengers
control panel for the driver's door - the con- are not trapped when the windows are
dow wiping22. The function stops when trol panels for the other doors operate their closed from the driver's door.
reverse gear is disengaged. respective power window.
If the rear window wiper is already on at con-
WARNING
tinuous speed, no change is made.
Check that children or other passengers
03 NOTE are not trapped if/when the windows are
closed using the remote control key.
On cars with rain sensors, the rear wiper is
activated during reversing if the sensor is
activated and it is raining. WARNING
If there are children in the car - remember
Related information to always switch off the power supply to
• Washer fluid - filling (p. 366) the power windows by selecting key posi-
tion 0 and then take the remote control key
with you when leaving the car. For infor-
Driver's door control panel. mation on key positions - see Key posi-
tions - functions at different levels (p. 77).
Switch for electric child safety locks* and
disengaging rear power window buttons;
see Child safety locks - electrical activa-
tion* (p. 178).
Rear window controls

Front window controls

22 This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.

100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


03 Instruments and controls

Operating movement. It is possible to override the pinch Resetting


protection when closing has been interrupted, If the battery is disconnected then the func-
e.g. if there is ice forming. After two succes- tion for automatic opening must be reset so
sive closing interruptions the pinch protection that it can work correctly.
will be forced and the automatic function
1. Gently raise the front section of the but-
deactivated for a short while, now it is possi-
ton to raise the window to its end position
ble to close by continually holding the button
and hold it there for one second.
pulled up.
2. Release the button briefly.
03
NOTE 3. Raise the front section of the button again
One way to reduce the pulsating wind for one second.
noise when the rear windows are open is
to also open the front windows slightly. WARNING
Operating the power windows.
A reset must take place for pinch protec-
Operating without auto Operating without auto tion to work.
Operating with auto Move one of the controls up/down gently.
The power windows move up/down as long
All power windows can be operated using the as the control is held in position.
control panel for the driver's door - the con- Operating with auto
trol panels for the other doors can only each Move one of the controls up/down to the end
operate their respective power window. Only position and release it. The window runs
one control panel can be operated at a time. automatically to its end position.
In order for the power windows to be used, Operating with the remote control key
the key position must be at least I - see Key and central locking
positions - functions at different levels (p. 77).
To remotely operate the power windows from
The power windows can be operated for a
the outside with the remote control key or
few minutes after the engine has been
from inside with central locking, see Remote
switched off and after the remote control key
control key (p. 157) and Locking/unlocking -
has been removed - although not after a door
from the inside (p. 173).
has been opened.
Closing of the windows is stopped and the
window is opened if anything prevents its

101
03 Instruments and controls

Door mirrors WARNING The function can be activated/deactivated in


The door mirror positions are adjusted with the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR
Both mirrors are the wide-angle type to (p. 109).
the joystick in the driver's door controls. provide optimal vision. Objects may
appear further away than they actually are. Automatic retraction when locking23
When the car is locked/unlocked with the
Storing settings23 remote control key the door mirrors are auto-
The settings for the rearview and door mirrors matically retracted/extended.
and the positions of the driver's seat can be The function can be activated/deactivated in
03
stored for each remote control key in the car the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR
key memory*, see Remote control key - per- (p. 109).
sonalisation* (p. 158).
Resetting to neutral
Angling the door mirror when parking23 Mirrors that have been moved out of position
The door mirror can be angled down for the by an external force must be reset electrically
driver to view the side of the road when park- to the neutral position for electric retracting/
Door mirror controls. ing for example. extending to work correctly:
– Engage reverse gear and press the L or R 1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R but-
Adjusting
button. tons.
1. Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror 2. Fold them out again with the L and R but-
door mirror. The light in the button illumi- automatically returns to its original position tons.
nates. after approx. 10 seconds, or earlier by press-
ing the button labelled L or R respectively. 3. Repeat the above procedure as neces-
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the sary.
centre. Automatic angling of the door mirror The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light when parking23
should no longer be illuminated. When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror Retractable power door mirrors*
is automatically angled down so that the The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driv-
driver can see the side of the road when ing in narrow spaces:
parking for example. When reverse gear is 1. Depress the L and R buttons simultane-
disengaged the mirror automatically returns ously (key position must be at least I).
to its original position after a short time.

23 Only in combination with power seat with memory, see Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 80).

102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


03 Instruments and controls

2. Release them after approximately 1 sec- Windows and rearview and door See also Demisting and defrosting the wind-
ond. The mirrors automatically stop in the mirrors - heating screen (p. 133).
fully retracted position. The defroster is used to quickly remove mist- The door mirrors and rear window are demis-
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L ing and ice from the windscreen, rear window ted/defrosted automatically if the car is
and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors and door mirrors. started in an outside temperature lower than
automatically stop in the fully extended posi- +7 °C. Automatic defrosting can be selected
tion.
Heated windscreen*, rear window and in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR
door mirrors (p. 109).
Home safe and approach lighting 03
The lamp on the door mirrors illuminates The compass (p. 105) is deactivated when
when approach lighting (p. 94) or home safe the heated windscreen is activated. When the
lighting (p. 94) is selected. heated windscreen is deactivated, the com-
pass is reactivated.
Related information
• Rearview mirror - interior (p. 104)
• Windows and rearview and door mirrors -
heating (p. 103)

Heating, windscreen

Heating, rear window and door mirrors


The function is used to remove ice and mist-
ing from the windscreen, rear window and
door mirrors.
One press of the respective button starts the
heating. The light in the button indicates that
the function is active. Switch off the heating
as soon as the ice/misting is cleared in order
not to load the battery unnecessarily. How-
ever, the function is switched off automati-
cally after a certain time.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 103


03 Instruments and controls

Rearview mirror - interior for manual dimming is not available on mir- Glass roof*
The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed rors with automatic dimming. The glass roof's blind can be operated with
with a control in the mirror's lower edge. The rearview mirror contains two sensors - the control in the roof console.
Alternatively, the rearview mirror dims auto- one forward facing and one rearward facing -
matically. The glass roof is fixed but the power oper-
that work together to identify and eliminate
ated roller blind can be operated in key posi-
dazzling light. The forward facing sensor
tion I or II with the control in the roof console.
detects ambient light, while the rearward fac-
For information on key positions - see Key
ing sensor detects the light from vehicle
positions - functions at different levels (p. 77).
03 headlights behind.

NOTE
If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking
permits, transponders, sun visors or
objects in the seats or in the cargo area in
such a way that light is prevented from
reaching the sensors, then the dimming
function of the rearview mirror is reduced.

Control for dimming Only rearview mirror with automatic dimming


can be equipped with compass (p. 105).
Manual dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in Related information Automatic opening to end position
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use • Door mirrors (p. 102)
dimming with the dimming control when Manual opening until the button is
lights from behind are distracting: released
1. Use dimming by moving the control in Manual closing until the button is
towards the passenger compartment. released
2. Return to normal position by moving the Automatic closing to end position
control towards the windscreen.

Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically
dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control

104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


03 Instruments and controls

IMPORTANT Compass* windscreen is deactivated, the compass is


The upper right-hand corner of the rearview reactivated.
• Avoid touching the blind because it
mirror contains a display that shows the com-
may then be damaged. Calibration
pass direction in which the front of the car is
• Only use the control in the roof con- The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
pointing.
sole to operate the blind. The compass is set for the geographic area to
Operation which the car was delivered. The compass
should be calibrated if the car is moved
across several magnetic zones. Proceed as
follows: 03

1. Stop the car in a large open area free


from steel structures and high-voltage
power lines.
2. Start the car.

NOTE
For the best calibration, switch off all elec-
trical equipment (climate control system,
Rearview mirror with compass. wipers, etc.) and makes sure that all doors
are closed.
Eight different directions are shown with Eng-
lish abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east),
E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW (south 3. Hold the button on the underside of the
west), W (west) and NW (north west). rearview mirror depressed
approx. 3 seconds. The number of the
The compass is activated automatically when current magnetic zone is shown.
the car is started or when key position II is
active, see Key positions - functions at differ-
ent levels (p. 77). To deactivate/activate the
compass - press in the button on the rear
side of the mirror using a paper clip for exam-
ple.
The compass is deactivated when the heated
windscreen is activated. When the heated
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105


03 Instruments and controls

Menu navigation - combined


instrument panel
The menus shown on the information display
in the combined instrument panel (p. 62) are
controlled with the left-hand stalk switch.
Which menus are shown depends on the key
position (p. 77).

03

Magnetic zones. Information displays (digital combined instrument


panel) and controls for menu navigation.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the
required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown. OK - access the menu, acknowledge
See the map of magnetic zones for the messages and confirm menu selections.
compass. Thumbwheel – browse between menu
options.
5. Wait until the display returns to showing
the character C, or hold the button on the RESET - reset data in the selected trip
bottom of the rearview mirror depressed Information display (analogue combined instru- computer step and go back in the menu
for approx. 6 seconds (use e.g. a paper ment panel) and menu navigation controls. structure.
clip) until the character C is shown. If there is a message (p. 107) then it must be
6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no acknowledged with OK in order that the
more than 10 km/h until a compass direc- menus shall be shown.
tion is shown in the display, indicating Related information
that calibration is complete. Then drive a • Messages - handling (p. 108)
further 2 circles to fine-tune calibration.
• Menu overview - analogue combined
7. Repeat the above procedure as neces- instrument panel (p. 107)
sary.
• Menu overview - digital combined instru-
ment panel (p. 107)

106
03 Instruments and controls

Menu overview - analogue combined Menu overview - digital combined Messages


instrument panel instrument panel When a warning, information or indicator
Which menus are shown in the combined Which menus are shown in the combined symbol illuminates, a corresponding message
instrument panel's information display instrument panel's information display appears on the information display.
depends on the key position (p. 77). depends on the key position (p. 77).
Message Specification
Some of the following menu options require Some of the following menu options require
the function and hardware to be installed in the function and hardware to be installed in Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the
the car. the car. engine. Serious risk of
03
Digital speed Settings* damage - consult a work-
shopB.
Parking heater* Themes
Stop engineA Stop and switch off the
Additional heater* Contrast mode/Colour mode
engine. Serious risk of
TC options Service status damage - consult a work-
Service status shopB.
Messages26
Oil level24 Oil level27 Service Contact a workshopB to
urgentA check the car immedi-
Messages (##)25 Parking heater* ately.
Trip computer reset
Related information Service Contact a workshopB to
• Menu navigation - combined instrument
Related information
requiredA check the car as soon as
panel (p. 106) possible.
• Menu navigation - combined instrument
• Menu overview - digital combined instru- panel (p. 106) See manualA Read the owner's man-
ment panel (p. 107)
• Menu overview - analogue combined ual.
• Combined instrument panel (p. 62) instrument panel (p. 107)
Book time Time to book regular
• Combined instrument panel (p. 62)
for mainte- service - contact a work-
nance shopB.

24 Certain engines.
25 The number of messages is indicated in brackets.
26 The number of messages is indicated in brackets.
27 Certain engines.
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107


03 Instruments and controls
||
Message Specification Message Specification Messages - handling
Use the left-hand stalk switch to acknowledge
Time for reg- Time for regular service - Transmission Critical fault. Stop the car and browse among messages (p. 107) that
ular mainte- contact a workshopB. The hot Stop immediately in a safe are shown in the information display of the
nance timing is determined by safely Wait manner and contact a combined instrument panel.
the number of kilometres for cooling workshopB.
driven, number of months When a warning, information or indicator
since the last service, Temporarily A function has been tem- symbol illuminates, a corresponding message
engine running time and offA porarily switched off and is shown in the display. An error message is
03 is reset automatically stored in a memory list until the fault has
oil grade.
while driving or after star- been rectified.
Maintenance If the service intervals are ting again.
Press OK on the left-hand stalk switch to
overdue not followed then the
warranty does not cover Low battery The audio system is acknowledge28 a message. Scroll through
any damaged parts - charge switched off to save messages with the thumbwheel (p. 106).
contact a workshopB. Power save energy. Charge the bat-
mode tery. NOTE
Transmission Contact a workshopB to If a warning message appears while you
A Part of message, shown together with information on
Oil change check the car as soon as where the problem has arisen. are using the trip computer, the message
needed possible. B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
C For more messages concerning automatic gearbox.
must be read (press OK) before the previ-
ous activity can be resumed.
Transmission Transmission cannot han-
Related information
Reduced dle full capacity. Drive
performance with care until the mes-
• Messages - handling (p. 108) Related information
sage clearsC. • Menu navigation - combined instrument • Menu overview - analogue combined
panel (p. 106) instrument panel (p. 107)
If shown repeatedly -
• Menu overview - digital combined instru-
contact a workshopB. ment panel (p. 107)
Transmission Drive more smoothly or
hot Reduce stop the car in a safe
speed manner. Disengage the
gear and run the engine
at idling speed until the
message clearsC.

108
03 Instruments and controls

MY CAR vary, depending on the equipment selected and


the market.
MY CAR is a menu source that handles many
of the car's functions, e.g. City Safety™, locks MY CAR - opens the menu system MY
and alarm, automatic fan speed, setting the CAR.
clock, etc. OK/MENU - press the button in the cen-
tre console or the thumbwheel on the
Certain functions are standard, others are steering wheel to select/tick in the high-
optional - the range also varies depending on lighted menu option or store the selected
the market. function in the memory. 03
Operation TUNE - turn the knob in the centre con-
Navigation in the menus is carried out using sole or the thumbwheel on the steering
buttons in the centre console or with the wheel to scroll up/down through the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad*. menu options.
EXIT

EXIT functions
Depending on the function the cursor is on
when EXIT is depressed briefly, and on which
menu level, one of the following may occur:
• phone call is rejected
• current function is interrupted
• input characters are deleted
• most recent selections are undone
• leads up in the menu system.
A long press on EXIT leads to the normal
view for MY CAR or if you are in the normal
Control panel in centre console and steering
wheel keypad. The figure is schematic - the num- view, to the highest menu level (main source
ber of functions and layout of the buttons both menu).

28 A message can also be acknowledged via the thumbwheel or RESET button.


}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109


03 Instruments and controls
||
Menu options and search paths Trip computer Related information
For a description of the menu options and The car's trip computer can record, calculate • Trip computer - analogue combined
search paths in MY CAR, see the Sensus and show information. instrument panel (p. 111)
Infotainment supplement. • Trip computer - digital combined instru-
General ment panel (p. 115)
Checking and settings can be made immedi-
ately after the combined instrument panel is
• Trip computer - supplementary informa-
tion (p. 119)
automatically illuminated in connection with
unlocking. If none of the trip computer's con- • Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 120)
03
trols are actuated within approx. 30 seconds
after the driver's door has been opened then
the instrument extinguishes, after which
either key position II (p. 77) or engine starting
is required in order to operate the trip com-
puter.

NOTE
If a warning message appears when the
trip computer is used then the message
must first be acknowledged before the trip
computer can be reactivated.
• Acknowledge the message by briefly
pressing the indicator stalk OK button.

Group menus
The trip computer has two different group
menus:
• Functions
• Heading in combined instrument panel
The trip computer's functions or headings
are each listed in an infinite loop.

110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


03 Instruments and controls

Trip computer - analogue combined Functions


instrument panel Proceed as follows to open and check/adjust
functions:
The trip computer's menu is in a variable
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle
loop. One of the alternatives is that the trip
of a sequence - "Reset" them first with
computer's display extinguishes - this also
two presses on RESET.
marks the start/end of the loop.
2. Press OK - the loop with all functions
opens.
3. Browse through the functions with the 03
thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.
4. Finish by pressing twice on RESET after
completed checking/adjustment.
The different functions of the trip computer
are listed in the following table:

Information display and controls.


OK - Opens the loop with the trip com-
puter's functions + Activates the selected
option.
Thumbwheel - Opens the loop with the
trip computer's headings + Scrolls
through the options.
RESET - Undoes, zeroes or backs out of
a function after making a selection.

}}

111
03 Instruments and controls
||
Functions Information
Digital speed Shows the car's speed digitally in the centre of the combined instrument panel:
• km/h • Open with OK, select with the thumbwheel, confirm with OK and back out with RESET.
• mph
• No display

Parking heater* For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger compart-
03 ment heater* - timer (p. 139).
• DIRECT START
• - Timer 1 - leads to the menu for select-
ing time.
• - Timer 2 - leads to the menu for select-
ing time.

Additional heater* For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 141).
• Auto On
• Off
TC options Here you can select/activate the options that you want to be available as selectable headings in
the trip computer. The symbols for the items already selected are WHITE with a "tick" - others are
• Distance to empty tank
GREY and have no "tick":
• Fuel consumption
1. Open the function with OK, scroll through the symbols for the options with the thumbwheel
• Average speed and select/stop on the desired symbol.
• Trip meter T1 and total dist. 2. Confirm with OK - the symbol changes colour from GREY to WHITE and is marked with a
• Trip meter T2 and total dist. "tick".
3. Continue to select the function symbols with the thumbwheel or finish with RESET.

Service status Shows the number of months and the distance until the next service.

112 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


03 Instruments and controls

Functions Information
Oil levelA For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 353).

Messages (##) For more information, see Messages (p. 107).

A Certain engines.

Headings 1. To ensure that no control is in the middle 3. Stop on desired heading.


of a sequence - "Reset" them first with 03
One of the headings in the following table can
be selected for constant display in the com- two presses on RESET.
bined instrument panel. Proceed as follows to 2. Turn the thumbwheel - selectable head-
determine which: ings for the trip computer are shown in a
loop.

Trip computer heading in combined instrument Information


panel
Trip meter T1 and total dist. • Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.

Trip meter T2 and total dist. • Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.

Distance to empty For more information - see the section"Range - distance to empty tank" (p. 119).

Fuel consumption Current consumption.

Average speed • Long press on RESET resets Average speed.

No trip computer information. This option shows a blank display - it also marks the beginning/end of the loop.

The combined instrument panel's trip com- • Turn the thumbwheel - stop on the Resetting - Trip meter and Average
puter can be changed to another option at desired heading. speed
any time during the journey. Proceed as fol- With the current trip computer heading - T1
lows: and total dist.,T2 and total dist. or

}}

113
03 Instruments and controls
||
Average speed - shown in the combined
instrument panel:
• Give a long press on RESET - selected
heading is zeroed.
Each heading must be zeroed individually.

Related information
• Trip computer (p. 110)
03
• Trip computer - digital combined instru-
ment panel (p. 115)
• Trip computer - supplementary informa-
tion (p. 119)
• Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 120)

114 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


03 Instruments and controls

Trip computer - digital combined Functions


instrument panel Proceed as follows to open and check/adjust
functions:
The trip computer's menu is in a variable
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle
loop. One of the alternatives is that the trip
of a sequence - "Reset" them first with
computer's three displays extinguish - this
two presses on RESET.
also marks the start/end of the loop.
2. Press OK - loop with all functions opens.
3. Browse through the functions with the
thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK. 03

4. Finish by pressing twice on RESET after


completed checking/adjustment.
The different functions of the trip computer
are listed in the following table:

Information displays and controls.


OK - Opens the loop with the trip com-
puter's functions + Activates the selected
option.
Thumbwheel - Opens the loop with the
trip computer's headings + Scrolls
through the options.
RESET - Undoes, zeroes or backs out of
a function after making a selection.

}}

115
03 Instruments and controls
||
Functions Information
Trip computer reset Note that this function does not reset both trip meters T1 and T2 - see table under next section
"Headings" and section "Resetting - Average speed/consumption" for information on the proc-
• Average
ess.
• Average speed

Messages For more information, see Messages (p. 107).

03 Themes Combined instrument panel appearance is selected here, see Digital combined instrument panel
- overview (p. 63).

Settings* Select Auto On or Off.


For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 141).

Contrast mode/Colour mode Adjusting the combined instrument panel's brightness and colour intensity.

For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger compart-
Parking heater*
ment heater* - timer (p. 139).
• Direct start
• - Symbol Timer 1 - leads to the menu for
selecting time.
• - Symbol Timer 2 - leads to the menu for
selecting time.

Service status Shows the number of months and the distance until the next service.

Oil levelA For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 353).

A Certain engines.

116 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


03 Instruments and controls

Headings One of the heading combinations in the fol-


lowing table can be selected for constant dis-
play in the combined instrument panel. Pro-
ceed as follows to determine which:
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle
of a sequence - "Reset" them first with
two presses on RESET.
2. Turn the thumbwheel - selectable head-
ing combinations are shown in a loop. 03
3. Stop on desired heading combination.

Three trip computer headings can be displayed


simultaneously - one in each "window".

Heading combinations Information


Average Trip meter T1 + Meter reading Average speed • Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.

Instantaneous Trip meter T2 + Meter reading Distance to empty • Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.
tank

Instantaneous Meter reading kmh<>mph kmh<>mph - "Digital speed display", see Trip computer - supplemen-
tary information (p. 119).

No trip computer information. This option extinguishes all three trip computer displays - it also marks
the beginning/end of the loop.

The combined instrument panel's heading • Turn the thumbwheel - stop on the Resetting - Trip meter
combination for the trip computer can be desired heading. Turn with the thumbwheel to the heading
changed to another option at any time during combination containing the trip meter to be
the journey. Proceed as follows: reset:

}}

117
03 Instruments and controls
||
• Give a long press on RESET - selected
trip meter is zeroed.

Resetting - Average speed/


consumption
1. Select function Trip computer
reset and activate with OK.
2. Select one of the following options with
03
the thumbwheel and activate with OK:
• l/100 km
• km/h
• Reset both
3. Finish with RESET.

Related information
• Trip computer (p. 110)
• Trip computer - analogue combined
instrument panel (p. 111)
• Trip computer - supplementary informa-
tion (p. 119)
• Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 120)

118 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


03 Instruments and controls

Trip computer - supplementary Range - distance to empty tank Change unit


information The trip computer shows the approximate You can change unit (km/miles) for distance
Supplementary information covering several distance that can be driven with the fuel and speed in the menu system MY CAR, see
functions follows below. quantity remaining in the tank. MY CAR (p. 109).
No guaranteed range remains when the head-
Average NOTE
ing Distance to empty shows "----".
Average fuel consumption is calculated from
the last resetting. • In which case, refuel as soon as possible. In addition to in the trip computer, these
units are also changed in Volvo's naviga-
The calculation is based on the average fuel tion system*. 03
NOTE consumption over the last 30 km and the
There may be a slight deviation if a fuel- remaining driveable fuel quantity.
Related information
driven heater* has been used. • Trip computer (p. 110)
NOTE
• Trip computer - analogue combined
Average speed There may be a slight deviation if the driv- instrument panel (p. 111)
The average speed is calculated for the driv- ing style has been changed.
• Trip computer - digital combined instru-
ing distance driven since the last reset to ment panel (p. 115)
zero. An economic driving style generally results in
a longer driving distance. For more informa-
• Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 120)
Instantaneous tion on how fuel consumption can be influ-
The information for current fuel consumption enced, see Environmental philosophy (p. 22).
is updated continuously - approximately once
per second. When the car is driven at low Digital speed display29
speed the consumption is shown per time The speed is shown in the opposite unit
unit - at a higher speed it is shown related to (kmh/mph) in relation to the main instrument.
mileage. If it is calibrated in mph then the trip com-
Different units (km/miles) can be selected for puter shows the corresponding speed in
the display - see section below."Change unit" km/h and vice versa.
(p. 119)

29 Only with combined instrument panel "Digital".

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 119


03 Instruments and controls

Trip computer - trip statistics* Operation • Trip computer - supplementary informa-


Information is stored about completed trips Different settings can be made in the menu tion (p. 119)
containing average fuel consumption and system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 109) -
average speed, which can be viewed in the there, find Trip statistics.
centre console's screen as a bar chart.
With the "Reset when vehicle has been off
Function for minimum 4h" option highlighted, all sta-
tistics are deleted automatically once driving
is complete and the car has been stopped for
03
4 hours. The journey statistics start again
from zero the next time the engine is started.
• Reset when vehicle has been off for
minimum 4h - highlight the box by
selecting ENTER and go back out of the
menu by selecting EXIT.
If a new drive cycle begins before 4 hours
have passed, the current period has to be
deleted manually first using the "Start new
trip" option.
Trip statistics30.
Each bar symbolises 1 km or 10 km driven
• Start new trip - ENTER is used to delete
all previous statistics, back out of the
distance, depending on the scale selected -
menu by selecting EXIT.
the bar at the far right shows the value for the
current kilometre or 10 km. See also information on Eco guide (p. 66).

The TUNE knob can be used to change the Related information


scale for each bar between 1 km and 10 km - • Trip computer (p. 110)
the cursor at the far right changes position • Trip computer - analogue combined
between up and down depending on the instrument panel (p. 111)
scale selected.
• Trip computer - digital combined instru-
ment panel (p. 115)

30 The figure is schematic - layout may vary depending on updated software and market.

120 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


CLIMATE CONTROL
04 Climate control

General information on climate • In warm weather, condensation from the Related information
control air conditioning may drip under the car. • Actual temperature (p. 123)
This is normal.
The car is equipped with electronic climate • Sensors - climate control (p. 123)
control. The climate control system cools or • When the engine requires full power, e.g.
• Menu settings - climate control (p. 125)
heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the for full acceleration, the air conditioning
passenger compartment. can be temporarily switched off. There • Air distribution in the passenger compart-
may then be a temporary increase in tem- ment (p. 126)
There are two different climate control sys- perature in the passenger compartment. • Air quality (p. 123)
tems: • Remove misting on the insides of the win- • Heated front seats* (p. 130)
• Electronic temperature control (ETC) dows primarily by using the defroster
function (p. 133). To reduce the risk of
• Heated rear seat* (p. 130)
(p. 129)
misting, keep the windows clean and use
• Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 128)
window cleaner.
04
NOTE Cars with Start/Stop*
Air conditioning (AC) (p. 132) can be With an auto-stopped (p. 277) engine certain
switched off, but to ensure the best possi- equipment may have its function temporarily
ble climate comfort in the passenger com- reduced, e.g. climate control fan speed
partment, and to prevent the windows (p. 131).
from misting, it should always be switched
on. Cars with ECO*
Certain equipment may have its function tem-
To bear in mind porarily reduced or deactivated when the
ECO (p. 286) function is activated, e.g. the air
• To ensure that the air conditioning works
optimally, the side windows must be conditioning (p. 132).
closed.
NOTE
• Global opening (p. 174) opens/closes all
side windows simultaneously and can be When the ECO function is activated, sev-
used for example to quickly air the car eral parameters in the climate control sys-
during hot weather. tem's settings are changed, and several
electricity consumer functions are
• Remove ice and snow from the climate reduced. Certain settings can be reset
control system air intake (the grille manually, but full functionality is only
between the bonnet and the windscreen). restored by deactivating the ECO function.

122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


04 Climate control

Actual temperature Sensors - climate control Air quality


The temperature you select in the passenger The climate control system has a number of The interior in a passenger compartment is
compartment corresponds to the physical sensors to help control the temperature designed to be pleasant and comfortable,
experience with reference to factors such as (p. 123) in the car. even for people with contact allergies and for
ambient temperature, air speed, humidity and asthma sufferers.
solar radiation etc. in and around the car at • The sun sensor is located on the top side
the time. of the dashboard. • Passenger compartment filter (p. 124)
• The temperature sensor for the passen- • Material in the passenger compartment
The system includes a sun sensor (p. 123) ger compartment is located below the cli- (p. 125)
which detects on which side the sun is shin- mate control panel.
ing into the passenger compartment. This
• Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)
• The outside temperature sensor is (p. 124)*
means1 that the temperature can differ located in the door mirror.
between the right and left-hand air vents • Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)
(p. 125)*
despite the controls being set for the same NOTE 04
temperature on both sides. Related information
Do not cover or block the sensors with
Related information clothing or other objects. • General information on climate control
(p. 122)
• General information on climate control
(p. 122) Related information
• Temperature control in the passenger • General information on climate control
compartment (p. 132) (p. 122)

1 Only applies to ECC.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 123


04 Climate control

Air quality - passenger compartment Air quality - Clean Zone Interior NOTE
filter Package (CZIP)*
To maintain the CZIP standard in cars with
All air entering the car's passenger compart- CZIP comprises a series of modifications that CZIP the IAQS filter should be changed
ment is cleaned with a filter. keep the passenger compartment even after 15 000 km or once per year depend-
clearer from allergy and asthma-inducing sub- ing on whichever occurs first. However, up
The filter must be replaced at regular inter- stances. to 75 000 km over 5 years. In cars without
vals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for CZIP and where the customer does not
the recommended replacement intervals. If The following is included: want to retain the CZIP standard, the IAQS
the car is used in a severely contaminated filter must be replaced during a regular
environment, it may be necessary to replace
• An enhanced fan function that means that service.
the fan starts when the car is opened with
the filter more often. the remote control key. The fan fills the
passenger compartment with fresh air. For more information on CZIP, see the bro-
NOTE The function starts when required and is chure included with the purchase of the car.
04 disengaged automatically after a time or
There are different types of passenger Related information
compartment filter. Make sure that the cor- when one of the passenger compartment
rect filter is fitted. doors is opened. The amount of time the • General information on climate control
fan runs is reduced gradually due to (p. 122)
reduced need up until the car is 4 years • Air quality (p. 123)
Related information old.
• Air quality (p. 123)
• The air quality system IAQS (p. 125) is a
fully automatic system that cleans the air
in the passenger compartment from con-
taminants such as particles, hydrocar-
bons, nitrous oxides and ground-level
ozone.

124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


04 Climate control

Air quality - IAQS* Air quality - material Menu settings - climate control
The air quality system IAQS separates gases Tested materials have been developed in It is possible to activate/deactivate or change
and particles to reduce the levels of odours order to minimise the quantity of dust in the the default settings for four of the climate
and pollution in the passenger compartment. passenger compartment and to contribute to control system's functions via the centre con-
making the passenger compartment easier to sole.
If the outside air is contaminated then the air keep clean.
intake is closed in order to shut out hydrocar- • Fan level during automatic climate con-
bons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone. The carpets in both the passenger compart- trol* (p. 131).
The air is recirculated in the passenger com- ment and the cargo area are removable and • Recirculation timer (p. 134).
partment. easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning
agents and car care products recommended
• Automatic start of rear window defroster
It is possible to activate/deactivate the func- (p. 103).
by Volvo to clean the interior (p. 384).
tion in the menu system MY CAR. For a • Interior air quality system* (p. 125).
description of the menu system, see MY CAR Related information The climate control system's functions can be 04
(p. 109). • Air quality (p. 123) reset to the default settings via the menu sys-
tem in MY CAR. For a description of the
NOTE menu system, see MY CAR (p. 109).
The air quality sensor must always be ena-
bled to ensure the best air in the passen- Related information
ger compartment. • General information on climate control
(p. 122)
In a cold climate, automatic recirculation is
limited so as to prevent misting.

Related information
• General information on climate control
(p. 122)
• Air quality (p. 123)
• Air quality - Clean Zone Interior Package
(CZIP)* (p. 124)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 125


04 Climate control

Air distribution in the passenger Air vents in the dashboard Air distribution
compartment
The incoming air is divided between a number
of different vents in the passenger compart-
ment.

04
Open Air distribution - defroster windscreen

Closed Air distribution - air vent instrument panel

Lateral airflow Air distribution - ventilation floor

Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO Vertical airflow The figure consists of three buttons. When
mode*. pressing the buttons the corresponding figure
Aim the vents at the side windows to remove is illuminated in the display screen (see figure
If necessary it can be controlled manually; misting. below) and an arrow in front of each part of
see the air distribution table (p. 135). the figure shows the air distribution that is
NOTE selected. For more information, see the air
Remember that small children may be sen- distribution table (p. 135).
sitive to air flows and draughts.

126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


04 Climate control

The selected air distribution is shown in the cen-


tre console display screen. 04

Related information
• General information on climate control
(p. 122)
• Auto-regulation (p. 131)
• Air distribution - recirculation (p. 134)

127
04 Climate control

Electronic climate control - ECC* compartment and can be set separately for The auto function is used to automatically
ECC (Electronic Climate Control) maintains the driver's side and passenger side. control temperature, air conditioning, fan
the temperature selected in the passenger speed, recirculation and air distribution.

04

Fan (p. 131) Rear window and door mirror defrosters Related information
(p. 103) • General information on climate control
AUTO - Automatic climate control (p. 122)
(p. 131) Setting, left/right-hand side for tempera-
ture control (p. 132)
Electrically heated front seat (p. 130), left
side Electrically heated front seat (p. 130),
right side
Heated windscreen* and max. defroster
(p. 133) Temperature control (p. 132)

Air distribution (p. 126) - ventilation floor Recirculation (p. 134)

Air distribution - air vent instrument panel ECO* (p. 286)

Air distribution - defroster windscreen AC - Air conditioning on/off (p. 132)

128 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


04 Climate control

Electronic temperature control - ETC


The passenger compartment's climate com-
fort is controlled manually using the ETC
(Electronic Temperature Control).

04

Fan (p. 131) Rear window and door mirror defrost-


ers (p. 103)
Electrically heated front seat (p. 130), left
side Recirculation (p. 134)

AC - Air conditioning on/off (p. 132) Electrically heated front seat (p. 130),
right side
Heated windscreen and max. defroster*
Temperature control (p. 132)
Air distribution (p. 126) - ventilation floor
ECO* (p. 286)
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Related information
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
• General information on climate control
(p. 122)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 129


04 Climate control

Heated front seats* • Lowest heat level - one orange field illu- Heated rear seat*
The front seat heating has three positions for minates in the screen. The heating for the rear seat's outer positions
increasing the comfort for driver and passen- • Switch off the heat - no field illuminates. has three positions for increasing the comfort
ger when it is cold. for passengers when it is cold.
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase
in temperature due to a lack of sensation
or who otherwise have problems operating
the controls for the heated seats. Other-
wise they may suffer burn injuries.

04 Related information
• General information on climate control
(p. 122)
• Heated rear seat* (p. 130)
Current heat level is shown in the centre console Current heat level is shown in the pushbutton's
display screen. lamps:
Press the button repeatedly in order to acti-
vate the function:
• Highest heat level - three lamps illumi-
nate.
• Lower heat level - two lamps illuminate.
• Lowest heat level - one lamp illuminates.
Press the button repeatedly in order to acti-
vate the function: • Switch off the heat - no lamp illuminates.

• Highest heat level - three orange fields


illuminate in the centre console's screen
(see figure above).
• Lower heat level - two orange fields illu-
minate in the screen.

130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


04 Climate control

WARNING Fan Auto-regulation


The fan should always be activated in order to Auto-regulation is only possible in electronic
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase avoid misting on the windows. climate control (ECC) (p. 128).
in temperature due to a lack of sensation
NOTE The auto function automati-
or who otherwise have problems operating
the controls for the heated seats. Other- cally regulates temperature
If the fan is fully switched off then the air (p. 132), air conditioning
wise they may suffer burn injuries. conditioning is not engaged - which can (p. 132), fan speed (p. 131),
cause a risk of misting on the windows.
recirculation (p. 134) and air
Related information distribution (p. 126).
• General information on climate control With ECC*
(p. 122) Turn the knob to increase or If you select one or more manual functions,
• Heated front seats* (p. 130) decrease fan speed, AUTO the other functions continue to be controlled
is disengaged. If AUTO is automatically. All manual settings are disen- 04
selected, then the fan speed gaged when AUTO is pressed. The display
is regulated automatically screen shows AUTO CLIMATE.
(p. 131) - the fan speed pre- Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in
viously set is disengaged. the menu system MY CAR. For a description
of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 109).
With ETC
Turn the knob to increase or Related information
decrease fan speed. • General information on climate control
(p. 122)

Related information
• General information on climate control
(p. 122)
• Electronic climate control - ECC* (p. 128)
• Electronic temperature control - ETC
(p. 129)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 131


04 Climate control

Temperature control in the passenger The temperatures on the Air conditioning


compartment driver and passenger sides The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies
When the car is started, the most recent tem- can be set independently. incoming air as required.
perature setting is resumed. Repeatedly press L/R in the
button to select the setting When the lamp in the AC
NOTE for left, right or both sides. button illuminates, the air
Set the temperature using conditioning is controlled by
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by the knob - the selected temperature for either the system's automatic func-
selecting a higher or lower temperature tion.
side is displayed in the centre console dis-
than the actual desired temperature.
play. When the lamp in the AC
With ETC button is switched off the air conditioning is
With ECC*
The temperature in the pas- disconnected. Other functions are still con-
senger compartment can be trolled automatically. When the max.
04
adjusted with the knob. defroster function (p. 133) is activated, the air
conditioning is switched on automatically so
that the air is dehumidified at the maximum
setting.

Related information
• General information on climate control
(p. 122)
• Actual temperature (p. 123)
• Electronic temperature control - ETC
Current temperature for each side is shown in (p. 129)
the centre console's display screen.
• Electronic climate control - ECC* (p. 128)

132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


04 Climate control

Demisting and defrosting the For cars without heated windscreens: NOTE
windscreen • Air flows to the windows - symbol (2) illu- Electrically heated windscreen is not avail-
Heated windscreen* and max. defroster are minates in the screen. able when the engine is auto-stopped
used to quickly remove misting and ice from (p. 277).
• Switch off the function - no symbol illumi-
the windscreen and side windows. nates.
For cars with heated windscreens: The following also takes place when the func-
tion is active in order to provide maximum
• Start the heating for thewindscreen2 - dehumidification in the passenger compart-
symbol (1) illuminates in the screen.
ment:
• Start the heating for the windscreen2 and
air flow to the windows - symbols (1) and • the air conditioning is automatically
engaged
(2) illuminate in the screen.
• Switch off the function - no symbol illumi- • recirculation and the air quality system
04
are automatically disengaged.
nates.

NOTE NOTE
The noise level increases as the fan is
Heated windscreen and IR window (p. 19)
The selected setting is shown in the centre con- operating at max.
may have an impact on the performance of
sole display screen. transponders and other communication
Heated windscreen* equipment. When the defroster is switched off the climate
control returns to the previous settings.
Max. defroster
NOTE Related information
The light in the defroster but-
ton illuminates when the A triangular area at the end of each side of • General information on climate control
the windscreen is not electrically heated, (p. 122)
function is active. where de-icing may take longer.
Press the button repeatedly
in order to activate the func-
tion.

2 The compass goes off when the heated windscreen is active.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 133


04 Climate control

Air distribution - recirculation Related information


Select recirculation to shut out bad air, • General information on climate control
exhaust gases etc. from the passenger com- (p. 122)
partment, i.e. no outside air is taken into the • Air distribution in the passenger compart-
car when this function is activated. ment (p. 126)

When recirculation is • Air distribution - table (p. 135)


engaged the orange lamp in
the button illuminates.

04 IMPORTANT
If the air in the car recirculates for too long,
there is a risk of misting on the insides of
the windows.

Timer
With the timer function activated the system
will exit manually activated recirculation mode
according to a time that depends on the out-
side temperature. This reduces the risk of ice,
misting and bad air.
It is possible to activate/deactivate the func-
tion in the menu system MY CAR. For a
description of the menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 109).

NOTE
When max. defroster is selected, recircula-
tion is always deactivated.

134
04 Climate control

Air distribution - table


Three buttons are used to select the distribu-
tion (p. 126) of the air.

Air distribution Use


A large amount of hot air flows to the windows. to remove ice and misting quickly.

Air to windscreen, via defroster vent, and side windows. Some to avoid misting and icing in a cold and humid climate (to
04
air flows from the air vents. achieve this the fan level must not be too low).

Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents. to ensure good comfort in warm, dry weather.

Airflow to the head and chest from the dashboard air vents. to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.

}}

135
04 Climate control
||
Air distribution Use
Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows from the dash- to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in
board air vents. cold or humid weather.

Air to floor and from dashboard air vents. in sunny weather with cool outside temperatures.

04

Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and win- to direct heat or cold to the floor.
dows.

Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor. to provide cooling along the floor in hot, dry weather or
warming upwards in cold weather.

Related information
• General information on climate control
(p. 122)
• Air distribution - recirculation (p. 134)

136
04 Climate control

Engine block heater and passenger Refuelling appears in the display. Acknowledge the
compartment heater* message by pressing the indicator stalk
Preconditioning prepares the heater, engine (p. 106) OK button once.
and passenger compartment before depar-
ture so that both wear and energy needs dur- IMPORTANT
ing the journey are reduced. Warming up your Repeated use of the heater in combination
car will also extend the driving distance. with short driving distances may cause low
The heater can be started directly (p. 138) or charge level in the starter battery, this can
lead to the heater stopping or never star-
with a timer (p. 139). ting. In the worst case, engine starting will
The heater cannot start if the outside tem- not be possible.
perature exceeds 15 °C. At –5 °C or lower the The car should be driven for the same time
maximum running time of the heater is 50 as the heater is used to ensure that the
Warning label on fuel filler flap. starter battery is recharged adequately to 04
minutes.
replace the energy consumed by the
heater when it is used on a regular basis.
WARNING WARNING The heater is used for a maximum of 50
Do not use the fuel-driven heater indoors. Fuel which spills out could be ignited. minutes each time.
Exhaust gases are secreted. Switch off the fuel-driven auxiliary heater
before starting to refuel.
Related information
Check in the combined instrument panel • Engine block heater and passenger com-
NOTE that the heater is switched off. The heat partment heater* - messages (p. 140)
When the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is symbol is shown when it is operating.
active there may be smoke from under-
• Additional heater* (p. 141)
neath the car, which is perfectly normal. Parking on a hill
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of
the car should point downhill to ensure that
there is a supply of fuel to the fuel-driven
heater.

Battery and fuel


If the battery has insufficient charge or the
fuel level is too low, the heater will be
switched off automatically and a message

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 137


04 Climate control

Engine block heater and passenger Direct start via the remote control key* If the button for information is depressed
compartment heater* - direct start when the heater is active then the indicator
The engine block heater and passenger com- lamp will show the status for this - at the
partment heater can be started directly. same time the car's lock status (p. 163) is
shown. While the status is being investigated
Direct start can be performed via: the indicator lamp emits a pair of short
• information display flashes followed by a constant glow if the
heater is active.
• remote control key*
• mobile*. Status is also shown in the trip computer dur-
ing heating.
Upon direct start of the engine block and
passenger compartment heater (p. 137), it will Direct start via a mobile*
run for 50 minutes. Activation and information about the selected
04 Indicator lamp on remote control key with PCC*.
Heating of the passenger compartment will settings that can be managed from a mobile
begin as soon as the engine coolant has The engine block heater and passenger com- phone will be available via the Volvo On Call*
reached the correct temperature. partment heater can be activated via the mobile app.
remote control key:
Related information
NOTE – Hold the button for approach lighting • Engine block heater and passenger com-
The car can be started and driven while depressed for 2 seconds. partment heater* - timer (p. 139)
the heater is running. • Engine block heater and passenger com-
Hazard warning flashers provide informa-
tion in accordance with the following: partment heater* - immediate stop
Direct start via the information display (p. 139)
1. Press OK to access the menu. • 5 short flashes followed by a constant
• Engine block heater and passenger com-
glow for approx. 3 seconds - the signal
partment heater* - messages (p. 140)
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking has reached the car and the heater has
heater and select with OK. been activated.
3. Scroll forward in the next menu to Direct • 5 short flashes - the signal has
start in order to activate the heater and reached the car but the heater has not
select with OK. been activated.

4. Exit the menu with RESET.


• Hazard warning flashers remain
switched off - the signal has not
reached the car.

138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


04 Climate control

Engine block heater and passenger Engine block heater and passenger 7. Select the required minute using the
compartment heater* - immediate compartment heater* - timer thumbwheel.
stop The timer of the engine block and passenger 8. Press OK3 to confirm the setting.
The engine block heater and passenger com- compartment heater (p. 137) is connected to
partment heater can be deactivated directly the car's clock. 9. Go back in the menu structure using
via the information display. RESET.
Two different times can be selected using the
10. Select the other time (continue from step
1. Press OK to access the menu. timer. Here, time refers to the time when the
2) or exit the menu with RESET.
car is heated and ready. The car's electronic
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
system calculates when heating should be Starting
heater and select with OK.
started based on the outside temperature. 1. Press OK to access the menu.
3. Scroll forward in the next menu to Stop in
order to deactivate the heater and select 2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
NOTE
with OK. heater and select with OK. 04
All timer programming will be cleared if the
4. Exit the menu with RESET. car's clock is reset. 3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and activate with OK.
Related information 4. Exit the menu with RESET.
• Engine block heater and passenger com- Adjusting
partment heater* - direct start (p. 138) 1. Press OK to access the menu.
Switching off
• Engine block heater and passenger com- 2. Scroll with the thumbwheel (p. 106) to A timer-started heater can be switched off
partment heater* - timer (p. 139) Parking heater and select with OK. manually before the set time has elapsed.
• Engine block heater and passenger com- Proceed as follows:
3. Select one of the two timers using the
partment heater* - messages (p. 140) thumbwheel and confirm with OK. 1. Press OK to access the menu.
4. Briefly press OK to move to the lit hours 2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
setting. heater and select with OK.
5. Select the required hour using the thumb- > If a timer is set but not activated, a
wheel. clock icon is shown next to the set
time.
6. Briefly press OK to move to the lit
minutes setting. 3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK.

3 Press OK again to activate the timer.


}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 139


04 Climate control
||
4. Deactivate the timer as follows: Engine block heater and passenger Sym- Mes- Specification
• long press on OK or compartment heater* - messages bol sage
Symbols and messages regarding the engine
• short press on OK to continue in the
The heater is
menu. Then select to stop the timer block and passenger compartment heater
(p. 137) differ depending on whether the com- switched on and
and confirm with OK.
bined instrument panel is analogue (p. 62) or running.
5. Exit the menu with RESET. digital (p. 63). The heater's timer
A timer-started heater can be switched off is activated after
When the heater has been activated
directly (p. 138). the remote control
the heat symbol illuminates in the
information display. key has been
Related information removed from the
• Engine block heater and passenger com- ignition switch and
partment heater* - messages (p. 140) When one of the timers is activated the sym-
04 bol for activated timer illuminates in the infor- leaving the car -
mation display at the same time as the set the engine and
time is shown next to the symbol. passenger com-
partment are
Symbol for activated timer in ana- heated at the set
logue combined instrument panel. time.

Fuel The heater has


Symbol for activated timer in digital operated been stopped by
combined instrument panel. heater the car's electron-
stopped ics in order to
Battery facilitate starting
The table shows symbols and display texts saving the engine.
that appear. mode

140 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


04 Climate control

Sym- Mes- Specification Additional heater* Fuel-driven additional heater*


bol sage For cars with diesel engines sold in cold cli- The car is equipped with either an electric
mate zones4 an additional heater may be (p. 142) or a fuel-driven additional heater
Fuel Setting the heater required to obtain the correct operating tem- (p. 141).
operated is not possible due perature in the engine and to obtain sufficient
heater to fuel level being heating in the passenger compartment. The heater starts automatically when extra
stopped too low - this is in heat is required when the engine is running.
Low fuel order to facilitate In such instances, the car is equipped with The heater is switched off automatically when
level starting the engine either the correct temperature is reached or when
as well as • electric additional heater (p. 142) or the engine is switched off.
approx. 50 km
driving. • fuel-driven additional heater (p. 141)5.
NOTE
Fuel Heater not work- Related information
When the auxiliary heater is active there 04
operated ing. Contact a • Engine block heater and passenger com- may be smoke from underneath the car,
heater workshop for partment heater* (p. 137) which is perfectly normal.
Service repair. Volvo rec-
required ommends that you Auto mode or shutdown
contact an author- The additional heater's automatic start
ised Volvo work- sequence can be switched off if required.
shop.
NOTE
A display text clears automatically after a time
or after one press on the indicator stalk Volvo recommends that the fuel-driven
additional heater should be switched off
(p. 106) OK button.
for short distances.
Related information
• Engine block heater and passenger com- 1. Before starting the engine: Select key
partment heater* - direct start (p. 138) position I (p. 77).
• Engine block heater and passenger com- 2. Press OK to access the menu.
partment heater* - timer (p. 139)

4 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned.
5 For cars equipped with parking heater (p. 137).
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 141


04 Climate control
||
3. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional Electric additional heater*
heater6 or Settings7 and select with OK. The car is equipped with either a fuel-driven
4. Select one of the options ON or OFF (p. 141) or an electric additional heater
using the thumbwheel and confirm with (p. 141).
OK. The heater cannot be controlled manually but
5. Exit the menu with RESET. is instead activated automatically after the
engine has been started in outside tempera-
NOTE tures below 9 °C and is switched off after the
set passenger compartment temperature has
The menu options are only visible in key been reached.
position I - any adjustments must therefore
be made before starting the engine. Related information
04 • Engine block heater and passenger com-
Related information partment heater* (p. 137)
• Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* (p. 137)

6 Analogue combined instrument panel.


7 Digital combined instrument panel.

142 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


LOADING AND STORAGE
05 Loading and storage

Storage spaces
Overview of storage spaces in the passenger
compartment.

05

144
05 Loading and storage

Storage compartment1 in door panel


Storage compartment, driver’s side
(p. 146)
Ticket clip

Storage compartment

Glovebox (p. 147)

Storage compartment, cup holder


(p. 146)
Cup holder* in rear seat

Storage pocket2
Storage compartment, rear seat

WARNING 05
Keep loose objects such as mobile
phones, cameras, remote controls for
accessories, etc. in the glove compartment
or other compartments. Otherwise they
may injure people in the car in the event of
sudden braking or a collision.

1 With ice scraper holder on the driver’s side.


2 Not applicable to textile upholstery.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 145


05 Loading and storage

Storage compartment driver’s side Tunnel console Tunnel console - armrest


This storage compartment (p. 144) is located The tunnel console is located between the The tunnel console is located between the
on the driver's side, to the left under the light- front seats. front seats.
ing panel.
When closed, the tunnel console's armrest
WARNING can be adjusted* longitudinally.

Do not keep any sharp objects in the com- Related information


partment, or objects which protrude. • Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets (p. 148)
• Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and
ashtray* (p. 147)

Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and


05 USB*/AUX input under the armrest.
Includes cup holder for driver and pas-
senger. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter
(p. 147) are specified, then there is a cig-
arette lighter in the 12 V socket (p. 148)
for the front seat and a detachable ash-
tray in the cup holder.)

Related information
• Storage spaces (p. 144)
• Tunnel console - armrest (p. 146)

146 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


05 Loading and storage

Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and Glovebox Glovebox - cooling*


ashtray* The glovebox is located on the passenger Glovebox (p. 147) can also be used as a
A detachable ashtray is fitted in the cup side. cooled area3.
holder under the armrest. The cigarette lighter
is fitted in the 12 V socket (p. 148) for the The owner's manual and maps can be kept in
front seat. here for example. There are also holders for
pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox
The ashtray in the tunnel console (p. 146) is can be locked* (p. 174), using the key blade
detached by lifting the tray straight up. (p. 165).
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button. Related information
The button pops out when the lighter is hot. • Storage spaces (p. 144)
Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the
heated coils. • Glovebox - cooling* (p. 147)

Related information
• Storage spaces (p. 144)
Start cooling by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment to 05
the end position.
Switch off the cooling by moving the con-
trol forwards to the end position.
Cooling is active when the climate control
system is active (i.e. in key position II (p. 77))
or when the engine is running.

3 Only applies to cars with ECC and certain markets.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147


05 Loading and storage

Inlay mats* Vanity mirror Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets


Inlay mats collect e.g. rubbish and slush. The vanity mirror is located on the rear of the The electrical sockets (12 V) are located in the
Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlay sun visor. tunnel console's storage compartment and
mats. beside the cup holder4.

WARNING
Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and
check before setting off that the mat by
the driver's seat is firmly affixed and
secured in the pins so that it does not get
caught adjacent to and under the pedals.

Related information
• Cleaning the interior (p. 384)

Vanity mirror with lighting.


05 The light illuminates automatically when the 12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.
cover is lifted. The electrical sockets can be used for various
accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. display
Related information screens, music players and mobile phones.
• Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting For the sockets to supply current, the remote
(p. 363) control key must be in at least key position I
(p. 77).

WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when
the socket is not in use.

4 If ashtray and cigarette lighter are specified then there is no cup holder and adjacent 12 V socket.

148 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


05 Loading and storage

NOTE Loading • Cover sharp edges with something soft to


Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. avoid damaging the upholstery.
Optional equipment and accessories - e.g.
display screens, music players and mobile • Secure all loads to the load retaining eye-
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. lets with straps or web lashings.
phones - which are connected to one of
The total of the weight of the passengers and
the passenger compartment's 12V electri-
cal sockets could be activated by the cli- all accessories reduces the car's payload by WARNING
mate control system, even when the a corresponding weight.
remote control key has been removed or A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a
For more detailed information on weights, see frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h,
when the car is locked, for example, when
Weights (p. 391). carry the impact of an item weighing
the engine block and passenger compart-
ment heater* is activated at a preset time. 1000 kg.
The tailgate is opened via a button
For this reason remove the plugs from the on the lighting panel or the remote
electrical sockets for optional equipment control key, see Locking/unlocking - WARNING
or accessories when not in use because tailgate (p. 174).
the battery could be drained in the event of The protection provided by the inflatable
such an occurrence! curtain in the headlining may be compro-
WARNING mised or eliminated by high loads.
The car’s driving properties change • Never load cargo above the backrest.
IMPORTANT depending on the weight and positioning 05
Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W) in of the load.
either socket. WARNING
To bear in mind when loading Always secure the load. Always secure the
NOTE • Position the load firmly against the rear load. During heavy braking the load may
seat's backrest. otherwise shift, causing personal injury to
The compressor for emergency puncture the car's occupants.
Note that objects must not prevent the func-
repair (p. 331) has been tested and Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
tion of the WHIPS system for the front seats if
approved by Volvo. For information on the something soft.
use of Volvo's recommended temporary any of the rear seat's backrests is folded
emergency puncture repair (TMK). down, see WHIPS - seating position (p. 39). Switch off the engine and apply the park-
ing brake when loading/unloading long
• Centre the load. items. Otherwise you may accidentally
Related information • Heavy objects should be placed as low knock the gear lever or gear selector with
• Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on the load into a drive position - and the car
ashtray* (p. 147) lowered backrests. could then move off.
• 12 V socket - cargo area (p. 152)

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149


05 Loading and storage
||
Related information Loading - long load Roof load
• Load retaining eyelets (p. 151) To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear The load carriers recommended for roof loads
• Cargo net (p. 153) seat backrest can be folded down. The pas- are the ones developed by Volvo. This is in
senger seat backrest can also be folded for an order to avoid damage to the car and in order
• Loading - long load (p. 150)
extra long load. to achieve the maximum possible safety dur-
• Roof load (p. 150) ing a journey.
Folding the passenger seat
See Seats, front (p. 78). Carefully follow the installation instructions
supplied with the carriers.
Lowering the rear seat backrest
See (p. 82). • Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured. Lash the
Related information load securely with retaining straps.
• Loading (p. 149) • Distribute the load evenly over the load
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the
bottom.
• The size of the area exposed to the wind,
and therefore fuel consumption, increase
05 with the size of the load.
• Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,
heavy braking and hard cornering.
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving cha-
racteristics are altered by roof loads.
For information about the maximum per-
mitted load on the roof, including load car-
riers and any space box, see Weights
(p. 391).

Related information
• Loading (p. 149)

150
05 Loading and storage

Load retaining eyelets Loading - bag holder Loading - folding bag holder*
The load retaining eyelets are used to fasten The bag holders keep carrier bags in place A folding bag holder in the floor keeps bags in
straps in order to anchor items in the cargo and prevent them from overturning and place and prevents them from overturning
area. spreading their contents around the cargo and spreading their contents in the cargo
area. The holder has a capacity of max. 3 kg. area, and can be opened up in three posi-
tions.

05
WARNING Bag holder
Folding bag holder
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which Related information
protrude may cause injury under violent • Loading (p. 149) It can be set to two adjustment positions and
braking. one service position, as it is known, where it
• Loading - folding bag holder* (p. 151)
is fully unfolded. There are also two floor
Always secure large and heavy objects
with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps. combination variants, one with adjustment
positions in a tub under the floor and one with
adjustment positions in plastic rails. The rais-
Related information ing below shows the adjustment position in a
• Loading (p. 149) tub under the floor.
The load on the central holder is max. 3 kg
and max. 10 kg on the outer holder.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151


05 Loading and storage
||
Folding up 12 V socket - cargo area NOTE
The electrical socket can be used for various
The compressor for temporary emergency
accessories designed for 12 Volts, e.g. dis- puncture repair has been tested and
play screens, music players and mobile approved by Volvo. For information on the
phones. use of Volvo's recommended temporary
emergency puncture repair (TMK), see
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 331).

Related information
• Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets (p. 148)

Lift the handle* on the upper floor and


fold up the floor.
Move the floor forwards to an appropriate
05 position and place it in the adjustment
groove. Lower the cover to access the electrical
3. In service position, the floor is moved all socket.
the way forwards towards the rear seat
• The socket also provides voltage when
back and placed in the plastic support in the remote control key is not in the igni-
the centre. tion switch.
Related information
• Loading (p. 149) IMPORTANT
• Loading - bag holder (p. 151) Max. socket current is 10 A (120 W).

NOTE
Remember that using the electrical socket
with the engine switched off involves the
risk of discharging the car's battery.

152 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


05 Loading and storage

Cargo net Attaching 3. Hook the other end of the rod into the
A cargo net prevents cargo from being roof mounting on the opposite side - the
thrown forward in the passenger compart- NOTE telescopic spring-loaded retaining hooks
ment in the event of heavy braking. facilitate alignment. Take care to press
The easiest way to fit the safety net is via forward the rod's retaining hooks for each
one of the rear doors.
respective roof mounting's front end posi-
tion.
WARNING
It is necessary to ensure that the upper
securing points of the safety net are fitted
correctly and that the puller-straps are
secured properly. Damaged nets must not
be used.

1. Unfold the cargo net and make sure that


the split upper rod is locked in the
extended position.
The cargo net is fitted into four mounting points. 05
2. Hook one end of the rod into the roof
For safety reasons, the cargo net must
mounting with the anchoring strap locks
always be correctly fastened and secured.
turned towards you.
The mesh is made of a strong nylon fabric
and secured behind the front seat backrests.

WARNING
Loads in the luggage compartment must
be anchored well, and also have a cor-
rectly fitted safety net.

}}

153
05 Loading and storage
||
4. Hook the cargo net's anchoring straps Removal and storage The folded cargo net is stored in its bag in the
into the eyes on the rear of the seat slide cargo area.
rails - it is easier if the backrests are
straightened and the seats are moved
forward slightly.
Pay attention to make sure that you do
not press the seat/backrest hard against
the net when the seat/backrest is moved
back again - only adjust until the seat/
backrest makes contact with the net.

IMPORTANT
If a seat/backrest is pushed backwards The cargo net can be easily removed and folded
hard into the safety net then the net and/or up.
its roof mounts may be damaged.
Release the tension in the net by pressing Related information
in the button on the anchoring strap's • Loading (p. 149)
05 5. Tension the cargo net with the anchoring lock and feeding out part of the strap.
straps. • Load retaining eyelets (p. 151)
Press in the catch and detach both of the
anchoring strap's hooks.
Unhook the rod from its roof mounting by
pulling back on the rod in the roof mount-
ings' rear end position. Press the rod in
any direction so that the hook engages in
the rod, which at the same time releases
the hook on the other side.
Finally, remove the remaining roof mount-
ing hook from the roof mounting.
4. Break the rod in the centre, fold it
together and roll up the net.
Insert the net in the storage bag.

154
05 Loading and storage

Hat shelf
The hat shelf can be removed to provide
additional cargo space.

Hat shelf removal

Undo the hat shelf lifting eyes on both 05


sides.
Unhook the front edge of the hat shelf
and remove it.

Related information
• Loading (p. 149)
• Loading - long load (p. 150)

155
LOCKS AND ALARM
06 Locks and alarm

Remote control key More information Remote control key - losing


Amongst other things, the remote control key • Remote Control Key Basic - is a key in If you lose a remote control key (p. 157) then
is used for locking/unlocking and starting the the basic version, see Remote control key a new one can be ordered at a workshop - an
engine. - functions (p. 161) for a description of its authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
functions.
• Remote control key without PCC - with The remaining remote control keys must be
There are three variants of key available - taken to the Volvo workshop. The code of the
Keyless Drive* (p. 167) and keyless lock-
Remote control key in basic version, Remote missing remote control key must be erased
ing (p. 169) and unlocking (p. 169).
control key without PCC* and Remote control from the system as a theft prevention meas-
key with PCC*. • Remote control key with PCC - also has
ure. The current number of keys registered to
an information button and indicator
lamps. Read more about these unique the car can be checked in the menu system
BasicA with- with functions (p. 163). MY CAR. For a description of the menu sys-
Function-
out PCCB tem, see MY CAR (p. 109).
ality All remote control keys have a detachable key
PCCA
blade (p. 164) made of metal. The visible Related information
Locking/ section is available in two versions so that it • Remote control key - functions (p. 161)
unlocking is possible to distinguish between the remote
• Remote control key - range (p. 162)
and detach- x x x control keys.
able key More remote control keys can be ordered -
blade but not variants other than the one supplied
with the car. Up to six keys can be pro-
Keyless
grammed and used for one single car.
locking/ x x 06
unlocking The car is supplied with two remote control
keys.
Keyless
engine star- x x
WARNING
ting
If there are children in the car:
Information
Remember to switch off the supply to the
button and
x power windows by removing the remote
indicator control key if the driver leaves the car.
lamps
A 5-button key
B 6-button key

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 157


06 Locks and alarm

Remote control key - personalisation* Proceed as follows in order to store the set- WARNING
The key memory in the remote control key tings and use the key memory in the remote
control key: Risk of crushing! Make sure that children
means that certain settings in the car can be do not play with the controls. Check that
individually adapted for different people. 1. Unlock the car with the remote control there are no objects in front of, behind or
key in whose memory the setting2 shall under the seat during adjustment. Make
The key memory function is available in com- sure that none of the passengers in the
be stored.
bination with power* driver's seat (p. 80). rear seat is in danger of becoming trap-
2. Make the desired settings for e.g. the ped.
Settings for door mirrors (p. 102), driver's seat and the door mirrors.
seat, steering force (p. 259) and the com-
3. The settings are stored in the current
bined instrument panel's theme, contrast and Changing settings
remote control key's memory.
colour mode (p. 63) can be stored in the key If several people each with a remote control
memory, depending on the car's equipment The next time the car is unlocked with the key approach the car, then the settings for
level. same remote control key, the positions that e.g. seat and door mirrors are implemented
are stored in the key memory will be set auto- for the person whose remote control key
The function1 can be activated/deactivated in matically - providing that they have been unlocks the driver's door.
the menu system MY CAR. For a description changed since the last time the current
of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 109). remote control key was used. If the driver's door has been opened by
person A with remote control key A, but
When the function is activated, the settings Emergency stop person B with remote control key B shall
are automatically linked to the key memory. If the seat accidentally begins to move, press drive, then the settings can be changed as
This means that a change in a setting will one of the setting buttons for the seat or follows:
automatically be saved in the specific remote memory buttons in order to stop the seat.
06
control key's memory. • Standing by the driver's door, or sitting
Restarting to reach the seat position stored in behind the steering wheel, person B
Storing settings the key memory is performed by pressing the presses the button for unlocking on
Make sure that the key memory function is unlock button on the remote control key. The his/her remote control key.
activated in the menu system MY CAR. driver's door must then be open. • Select one of three possible memories for
seat adjustment with seat button 1-3.
• Adjust the seat and door mirrors man-
ually.

1 Known as Car key memory in MY CAR.


2 This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.

158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


06 Locks and alarm

Related information Locking/unlocking - indicator Lock indicator


• Remote control key - functions (p. 161) When the car is locked or unlocked using the A flashing LED by the windscreen verifies that
• Remote control key with PCC* - unique remote control key (p. 157) the direction indi- the car is locked.
functions (p. 163) cators confirm that locking/unlocking was
correctly performed.

• Locking - one flash and the door mirrors


are folded3 in.
• Unlocking - two flashes and the door mir-
rors are folded3 out.

NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key in the car.

When locking, indication is given only if all Same LED as alarm indicator (p. 180).
locks have been locked and all doors are
closed. Indication is given when the last door NOTE
has been closed.
Cars that are not equipped with alarm also
Selecting the function have this indicator.
Different options for indicating locking/ 06
unlocking with light can be set in the menu Related information
system MY CAR. For a description of the • Locking/unlocking - indicator (p. 159)
menu system, see MY CAR (p. 109).

Related information
• Keyless drive* (p. 167)
• Lock indicator (p. 159)
• Alarm indicator (p. 180)

3 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159


06 Locks and alarm

Remote control key - electronic Mes- Specification Remote-controlled immobiliser with


immobiliser sage tracking system*
The electronic immobiliser is a theft protec- Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking
tion system that prevents the vehicle from Insert car Error when reading the system4 makes it possible to track and locate
being started (p. 266) by an unauthorised key remote control key during the car, and to remotely activate the immobi-
person. starting - Remove the key liser to switch off the engine.
from the ignition switch,
Each remote control key (p. 157) has a unique press it in again and make a Contact your nearest Volvo dealer for more
code. The car can only be started with the new start attempt. information and assistance with activating the
correct remote control key with the correct system.
code. Car key Error reading the remote con-
not trol key during starting - Try Related information
The following error messages in the com-
foundA to start again. • Remote control key (p. 157)
bined instrument panel's information display
are related to the electronic immobiliser: If the error persists: Insert the • Remote control key - electronic immobi-
remote control key into the liser (p. 160)
ignition switch and try to start
again.

Immobi- Error in immobiliser system


liser Try during starting. If the error
to start persists: Contact a workshop
again - an authorised Volvo work-
06 shop is recommended.
A Applicable only to cars with the Keyless function

Related information
• Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system* (p. 160)
• Keyless drive* (p. 167)

4 Only certain markets and in combination with Volvo On Call*.

160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


06 Locks and alarm

Remote control key - functions Unlocking (p. 171) - Unlocks the doors
The remote control key has functions such as and tailgate while the alarm is deactivated.
locking and unlocking the doors. Press and hold to open all windows simulta-
Functions neously. For more information, see Total air-
ing function (p. 174).
The function can be changed from unlocking
all doors simultaneously, to unlocking the
driver's door only with one press of the but-
ton and, after a further press of the button -
within ten seconds - unlocking the remaining
doors.
Remote control key with PCC* (Personal Car The function can be changed in the menu
Communicator).
system MY CAR. For a description of the
Information button - see Remote control menu system, see MY CAR (p. 109).
key with PCC* - unique functions (p. 163)
for a description of its functionality. Approach light duration (p. 94) - Used
Remote control key in basic version. to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.
Function buttons
Locking Tailgate (p. 174) - Unlocks and disarms
Locking – Locks the doors and tailgate
Unlocking while the alarm is activated, see Locking/ the alarm for the tailgate only.
unlocking - from the outside (p. 171). Panic function – Used to attract atten-
Approach light duration 06
Press and hold to close all windows simulta- tion in an emergency.
Tailgate neously. For more information, see Total air- Press and hold the button for at least three
ing function (p. 174). seconds or press it twice within three sec-
Panic function
onds to activate the direction indicators and
WARNING the horn.
If windows are closed using the remote The function can be turned off with the same
control key, check that nobody's hands button once it has been active for at least five
are trapped. seconds. Otherwise the function switches off
automatically after approx. three minutes.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161


06 Locks and alarm
||
Related information Remote control key - range Related information
• Remote control key (p. 157) Remote control key functions (in its basic ver- • Remote control key (p. 157)
sion) have a range of approx. 20 metres from • Remote control key - functions (p. 161)
the car.

If the car does not verify a button being


pressed - move closer and try again.

NOTE
The remote control key functions may be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions, etc.
The car can always be locked/unlocked
with the key blade (p. 165).

If the remote control key is removed from the


car when the engine is running or key position
I or II (p. 76) is active, and if all doors are
closed, then a warning message is shown in
the information display in the combined
instrument panel and an audio reminder sig-
nal sounds at the same time.
06
The message is extinguished and the audible
reminder signal stops when the remote con-
trol key is brought back to the car after
either/or:
• The remote control key has been inserted
in the ignition switch.
• Speed exceeds 30 km/h.
• The OK button has been pressed.

162
06 Locks and alarm

Remote control key with PCC* - Using the information button


unique functions – Press the information button .
A remote control key with PCC* has > All indicator lamps flash for approxi-
enhanced functionality compared with a mately 7 seconds and the light travels
remote control key in basic version (p. 157) in around on the PCC. This indicates that
the form of an information button and indica- information from the car has been
tor lamps. read.
If any of the other buttons are pressed
during this time then the reading is
interrupted.

NOTE Green continuous light – the car is


If none of the indicator lamps illumi- locked.
nates with repeated use of the information Yellow continuous light – the car is
button and in different locations (as well as unlocked.
after 7 seconds and after the light has
travelled around on the PCC), contact a Red continuous light – the alarm has
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop been triggered since the car was locked.
is recommended. Red light flashing alternately in both indi-
Remote control key with PCC. cator lamps – The alarm was triggered
Information button Indicator lamps display information in accord- less than 5 minutes ago.
06
ance with the following illustration:
Indicator lamps Related information
Using the information button enables access
• Remote control key with PCC* - range
(p. 164)
to certain information from the car via the
indicator lamps.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163


06 Locks and alarm

Remote control key with PCC* - range Related information Detachable key blade
The range of a remote control key with PCC • Keyless Drive* - range (p. 167) The remote control key contains a detachable
(Personal Car Communicator) for unlocking • Remote control key - range (p. 162) key blade of metal with which some functions
the doors and tailgate is approx. 20 metres can be activated and some operations carried
from the car - the other functions are up to out.
approx. 100 metres. If the car does not verify
a button being pressed - move closer and try The key blade's unique code is provided by
again. authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec-
ommended when ordering new key blades.
NOTE
Key blade functions
The information button function may be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves, Using the remote control key's detachable
buildings, topographical conditions, etc. key blade:
• the left-hand front door can be opened
Out of range manually (p. 165) if central locking can-
If the remote control key is too far away from not be activated with the remote control
the car for the information to be read then the key.
status the car was last left in is shown, with- • the rear doors' mechanical child safety
out the light travelling around on the remote locks can be activated/deactivated
control key. (p. 177).
If several remote control keys are used for the • the right-hand front door and the rear
06 doors can be locked manually, e.g. in the
car then it is only the remote control key last
event of power failure.
used for locking/unlocking that shows the
correct status. • the glovebox lock* opens.
• the airbag for front passenger seat
NOTE (PACOS*) can be activated/deactivated.

If none of the indicator lamps illumi- Related information


nates with repeated use of the information • Manual locking of the door (p. 172)
button and in different locations (as well as
after 7 seconds and after the light has • Locking/unlocking - glovebox (p. 174)
travelled around on the PCC), contact a • Passenger airbag - activating/deactivat-
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop ing* (p. 34)
is recommended.

164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


06 Locks and alarm

Detachable key blade - detaching/ Related information Detachable key blade - unlocking
attaching • Detachable key blade - unlocking doors doors
Detaching/attaching the detachable key blade (p. 165) The detachable key blade can be used if the
(p. 164) is carried out as follows: • Child safety locks - manual activation central locking cannot be activated with the
(p. 177) remote control key - e.g. if the remote control
Removing the key blade key's battery (p. 166) has been discharged.
• Passenger airbag - activating/deactivat-
ing* (p. 34)
The left-hand front door can be opened as
follows:
1. Unlock the left-hand front door with the
key blade in the door handle's lock cylin-
der. For more information, see Keyless
Drive* - unlocking with the key blade
(p. 170).

NOTE
When the door has been unlocked using
the key blade and is opened, the alarm is
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side. triggered.
At the same time pull the key blade
straight out backwards. 2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch. 06
Attaching the key blade
For a car with Keyless Drive, see Keyless
Carefully refit the key blade into its location in
Drive* - unlocking with the key blade (p. 170).
the remote control key (p. 157).
1. Hold the remote control key with the slot Related information
pointed up and lower the key blade into • Detachable key blade (p. 164)
its slot. • Remote control key (p. 157)
2. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is
locked in.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165


06 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/PCC - replacing NOTE


the battery
Turn the remote control key over with the
The battery6 in the remote control key may buttons facing up, this is to avoid the bat-
need to be replaced. teries falling out when it is opened.
The battery for the remote control key should
be replaced if: IMPORTANT
• the information symbol is illuminated and Avoid touching new batteries and their
the display in the combined instrument contact surfaces with your fingers as this
panel shows Car key battery low See may impair their function.
manual
and/or Battery replacement
• the locks repeatedly do not react to sig-
nals from the remote control key within NOTE
20 metres from the car. Volvo recommends that the batteries to be
used in the remote control key/PCC fulfil
UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III,
sub-section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the
factory or replaced by an authorised Volvo
Opening workshop fulfil the above criteria.
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the
06 side. Closely study how the battery/batteries
are secured on the inside of the cover,
At the same time pull the key blade
with regard to their (+) and (–) sides.
straight out backwards.
Remote control key with one battery
Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the
1. Carefully prize out the battery.
hole behind the spring-loaded catch and
gently prize the remote control key up. 2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.

6 Remote control key with PCC has two batteries.

166
06 Locks and alarm

Remote control key with PCC* with two Keyless drive* Keyless Drive* - range9
batteries Cars equipped with Keyless Drive have a star- In order to unlock the doors or tailgate auto-
1. Carefully prize out the batteries. ting and locking system that can be operated matically without pressing a button on the
2. First install one new one with the (+) side keylessly. remote control key, a remote control key must
up. be within approx. 1.5 metres from the car's
With the keyless starting and locking system door handle or tailgate.
3. Position the white plastic tab in between the car can be started, locked and unlocked
and finally install a second new battery without the remote control key (p. 157) The person who wishes to lock or unlock a
with the (+) side down.
inserted in the ignition switch7. It is enough to door must have the remote control key with
Battery type have the remote control key with you in a him or her. It is not possible to lock or unlock
Use batteries with designation CR2430, 3 V. pocket. The system makes it easier and more a door if the remote control key is on the
convenient to e.g. open the car when your opposite side of the car.
Assembly hands are full.
1. Press the remote control key together. Both of the remote control keys included with
2. Hold the remote control key with the slot the car have Keyless functionality. It is possi-
pointed up and lower the key blade into ble to order more remote control keys.
its slot. The car's electrical system can be set to
3. Lightly press the key blade. You should three different levels - key position 0, I and II
hear a "click" when the key blade is (p. 77) - with the remote control key.
locked in.
Related information
IMPORTANT • Keyless Drive* - range (p. 167) 06
• Keyless Drive* - secure handling of the
Make sure that exhausted batteries are remote control key (p. 168)
disposed of in a manner which is kind to
the environment. • Keyless Drive* - interference to remote The red rings in the above figure indicate the
control key function (p. 168) range covered by the system's antennas.
Related information If all remote control keys are removed from
• Remote control key (p. 157) the car when the engine is running or key
position I or II (p. 77) is active, and if a door
• Remote control key - functions (p. 161)
has been opened and then closed, then a

7 Does not apply to Remote Control Key Basic.


9 Does not apply to cars with keyless start
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167


06 Locks and alarm
||
warning message is shown in the information Keyless Drive* - secure handling of Keyless Drive* - interference to
display in the combined instrument panel and the remote control key remote control key function
an audio reminder signal sounds at the same It is important to handle all remote control Electromagnetic fields and screening can
time. keys with great care. interfere with the remote control key's Keyless
When the remote control key has been functions (p. 167).
returned to the car, the warning message If one of the remote control keys10 has been
goes off and the audible reminder ceases left in the car then the Keyless functionality is NOTE
once either/or: deactivated in case the car is e.g. locked with
the other remote control key that belongs to Do not place/store the remote control key
• a door has been opened and closed with keyless function near a mobile phone
the car. This prevents unauthorised entry. or metal object - no closer than 10-15 cm.
• the remote control key has been inserted The next time the car is unlocked with the
in the ignition switch other remote control key the forgotten remote If interference is experienced nonetheless,
• The OK button on the direction indicator control key is reactivated again. use the remote control key and the key blade
stalk.
like a remote control key in basic version
Related information IMPORTANT (p. 157).
• Keyless drive* (p. 167) Avoid leaving the remote control key with
Related information
• Keyless Drive* - antenna location (p. 171) PCC behind in the car. If someone breaks
into your car and takes the remote control • Remote control key/PCC - replacing the
key, it will e.g. be possible to start the car battery (p. 166)
by pressing the remote control key in the • Keyless Drive* - secure handling of the
ignition switch and then pressing the remote control key (p. 168)
START/STOP ENGINE button.
06 • Keyless Drive* - range (p. 167)

Related information
• Keyless drive* (p. 167)

10 Applies to remote control key with PCC (Personal Car Communicator).

168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


06 Locks and alarm

Keyless Drive* - locking Related information Keyless Drive* - unlocking12


Cars equipped with Keyless Drive have a • Keyless drive* (p. 167) Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a
touch-sensitive area on the outer handle of • Alarm indicator (p. 180) door handle or the tailgate's rubberised pres-
the doors and a rubberised button next to the sure plate is actuated - open the door or tail-
tailgate's rubberised pressure plate. gate as normal.

NOTE
The door handles normally register a hand
that takes hold of the handle, but with
thick gloves on or after a very quick hand
movement a second attempt may be
required, or with the glove taken off.

Related information
• Keyless drive* (p. 167)
• Keyless Drive* - locking (p. 169)

Lock the doors and the tailgate by grasping


one of the door handles or pressing the
smaller of the tailgate's two rubberised but-
tons - the lock indicator (p. 159) in the wind- 06
screen confirms that locking has been com-
pleted by starting to flash.
All doors and the tailgate must be closed
before the car can be locked - otherwise the
car is not locked.

NOTE
In cars with automatic gearbox selectors,
the gear selector must be set to the P
position; otherwise the car can be neither
locked nor alarmed.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169


06 Locks and alarm

Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the 1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight Keyless Drive* - lock settings
key blade up into the hole on the underside of the Lock settings for cars equipped with Keyless
If central locking cannot be activated with the door handle/cover - do not prize. Drive can be adapted by indicating in the
remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are > The plastic cover loosens automati- menu system MY CAR which doors are to be
discharged, then the left-hand front door can cally by means of the torque when the unlocked.
be opened using the remote control key's blade is pushed straight up and into
detachable key blade (p. 164). the opening. For a description of the menu system, see
MY CAR (p. 109).
2. Then insert the key blade in the lock cyl-
inder and unlock the door. Related information
3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking. • Keyless drive* (p. 167)

NOTE
When the left-hand front door is unlocked
using the key blade and is opened, this
triggers the alarm (p. 179). It is switched
off by inserting the remote control key in
the ignition switch, see Alarm - remote
control key not working (p. 181).

Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover. Related information


06 To access the lock cylinder, the door handle's • Keyless drive* (p. 167)
plastic cover must be removed - this is also • Detachable key blade - detaching/attach-
done with the key blade: ing (p. 165)

12 Does not apply to remote control key with keyless start.

170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


06 Locks and alarm

Keyless Drive* - antenna location WARNING Locking/unlocking - from the outside


Cars equipped with Keyless Drive have a Locking/unlocking from the outside is carried
People with pacemaker operations should
number of built-in antennas positioned at dif- not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless out using the remote control key (p. 161). The
ferent locations in the car. system's antennae with their pacemaker. remote control key can lock/unlock all doors,
This is to prevent interference between the the tailgate and the fuel filler flap. Different
pacemaker and the keyless system. sequences for unlocking can be selected.

In order that the lock sequence can be acti-


Related information vated, the driver's door must be closed - if
• Keyless drive* (p. 167) any of the other doors or the tailgate is open,
then it/they is/are locked and the alarm is
activated only when it/they are closed. For
cars equipped with keyless locking system*
all doors and the tailgate must be closed, see
Keyless Drive* - locking (p. 169) and Keyless
Drive* - unlocking (p. 169).

NOTE
Rear bumper, centre
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
Door handle, left rear control key in the car.
Cargo area, central and furthest in under
the floor If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the 06
remote control key, the battery may be dis-
Door handle, right rear
charged - lock or unlock the left-hand front
Centre console, under the rear section door with the detachable key blade (p. 165).

Centre console, under the front section. NOTE


Remember that the alarm is triggered
when the door is opened after being
unlocked with the key blade - the alarm is
switched off when the remote control key
is inserted into the ignition switch.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171


06 Locks and alarm
||
WARNING Manual locking of the door The door can be opened from both the
In certain situations the car must be lockable outside and the inside.
Be aware of the risk of being locked in the
car when it is locked from the outside manually, e.g. in the event of power failure. The door is blocked against opening from
using the remote control key - it is then not the outside. To return to position A, the
The left-hand front door can be locked with inner door handle must be opened.
possible to open any of the doors from the
inside with the door controls. For more its lock cylinder and the remote control key's
detachable key blade (p. 170). The doors can also be unlocked with the
information, see Deadlocks* (p. 176).
unlock button on the remote control key
Other doors have no lock cylinders and (p. 157) or with the central locking button on
Automatic relocking instead have a lock switch on the end of each the driver's door.
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened door which must be depressed using the key
within two minutes of unlocking, all are blade - they are then mechanically locked/ NOTE
locked again automatically. This function pre- blocked to prevent them being opened from
vents the car from being left unlocked unin- outside. The doors can still be opened from • A door's lock reset only locks that par-
tentionally. For cars with alarm, see Alarm the inside. ticular door - not all doors simultane-
(p. 179). ously.
• A manually locked rear door with acti-
Related information vated manual child safety locks
• Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 177) cannot be opened from either
(p. 173) the outside or the inside. A rear door
• Remote control key - functions (p. 161) that is locked in this way can only be
unlocked with the remote control key
or central locking button.
06

Related information
• Remote control key/PCC - replacing the
battery (p. 166)
Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up
with child safety locks (p. 177).
– Remove the detachable key blade
(p. 165) from the remote control key.
Insert the key blade in the hole for lock
reset and press the key in until the key
bottoms, approx. 12 mm.

172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


06 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking - from the inside With central locking button on both front The function can be activated/deactivated in
Locking/unlocking can be performed using doors and electric lock button in each rear the menu system MY CAR. For a description
the driver's door button for central locking. All door: of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 109).
doors and tailgate (p. 174) can be locked or • Illuminated lamp means that only that Related information
unlocked simultaneously. particular door is locked. When all but-
• Locking/unlocking - from the outside
tons are illuminated all doors are locked. (p. 171)
Unlocking • Alarm (p. 179)
A door can be unlocked from the inside in
two different ways:
• Press the central locking button .
A long press also opens all the side windows*
simultaneously (see also section Total airing
function (p. 174)).
• Pull the door handle and open the door -
the door is unlocked and opened in one
operation.
Central locking
Locking
• Press one side of the button to lock -
• Both front doors must be closed for the
the other side to unlock. central locking to be activated. Press the
central locking button - all doors are 06
Lamp in lock button
When the lamp in the central locking button locked. If any of the rear doors is open, it
will lock when it is closed.
for the driver's door is illuminated it means
that all doors are locked. A long press also closes all the side windows
simultaneously (see also section Total airing
With central locking button only in the driver's function (p. 174)).
door, other doors have no button:
• Illuminated lamp means that all doors are Automatic locking
locked. The doors and tailgate are locked automati-
cally when the car starts to move.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173


06 Locks and alarm

Total airing function Locking/unlocking - glovebox Locking/unlocking - tailgate


The total airing function opens or closes all The glovebox (p. 147) can only be locked/ The tailgate can be opened, locked and
side windows simultaneously and can be unlocked using the detachable key blade from unlocked in a number of different ways.
used for example to quickly air the car during the remote control key (p. 157).
hot weather. Manual opening
For information on the key blade, see Detach-
able key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 165).

Rubber plate with electrical contact.


Central locking button
The tailgate is held closed by an electrical
A long press on the symbol in the central lock. To open:
Locking the glovebox:
locking button opens all side windows simul- 1. Push down gently on the wider of the two
06 taneously. The same procedure on the Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock
rubberised pressure plates under the
button closes all side windows simulta- cylinder. outer handle - the lock is released.
neously. Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. 2. Lift the outside handle in order to fully
The keyhole is horizontal in the locked open the tailgate.
Related information position.
• Locking/unlocking - from the inside
(p. 173) Pull out the key blade.
• Power windows (p. 100) • Unlock by carrying this out in reverse
order.

Related information
• Remote control key - functions (p. 161)

174
06 Locks and alarm

IMPORTANT The doors remain locked and armed. Opening the car from inside
• Minimal force is required to release the The tailgate can be opened in two different
rear hatch lock - just gently press the ways using the remote control key:
rubberised panel. One press - The boot lid is unlocked, but
• Do not place the lift force on the rub- remains closed - press lightly on the rubber-
ber panel when opening the rear hatch ised pressure plate under the outer handle
- lift the handle. Using too much force and lift the boot lid. If the tailgate is not
may damage the electrical contacts on opened within 2 minutes then it is relocked
the rubber panel. and the alarm is re-armed.
Two presses - The boot lid is unlocked and
Unlocking with the remote control key the lock is disengaged at which the boot lid
opens about a centimetre - lift the outer han-
dle to open. Rain, cold, frost or snow could
Unlocking, tailgate
however prevent the tailgate from disengag-
ing from the lock. To open the tailgate:
– Press the lighting panel button (1).
NOTE
> The lock releases and the tailgate
• When the boot lid/tailgate is unlocked opens by a few centimetres.
with 2 presses or from the car interior,
automatic relocking does not take Locking with the remote control key
place because the boot lid/tailgate is – Press the remote control key (p. 161) but- 06
open - it must be closed manually. ton for locking .
• After the boot lid/tailgate has been > The lock indicator on the instrument
Using the remote control key (p. 157) closed it is unlocked and the alarm is panel starts flashing, which means that
button the alarm for the tailgate can be dis- not armed - relock it and re-arm the the car is locked and the alarm* has
armed* and the tailgate unlocked on its own. alarm with the remote control key's been activated.
lock button .
The lock indicator (p. 159) on the instrument
Related information
panel stops flashing in order to show that not
all of the car is locked and the alarm's* level • Locking/unlocking - from the inside
(p. 173)
and movement sensors and the sensors for
opening the tailgate are disconnected. • Locking/unlocking - from the outside
(p. 171)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175


06 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap Deadlocks* Temporary deactivation


The fuel filler flap is unlocked with the remote Deadlocks13 means that all door handles are
control key (p. 157) button for unlocking mechanically disengaged, which prevents
( ). doors being opened from the inside.

The fuel filler flap remains unlocked until the The deadlocks are activated with the remote
car is locked with the remote control key's control key (p. 157) and are set after an
button for locking ( ). If the car is locked approx. ten seconds delay after the doors
while driving or with the interior buttons then have been locked.
the fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
NOTE
The fuel filler flap's locking logic also follows
the locking or unlocking of the Keyless sys- If a door is opened within the delay time
tem and the central locking system. then the sequence is interrupted and the
alarm is deactivated. Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
Related information MY CAR
• Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing (p. 294) The car can only be unlocked with the remote
OK MENU
• Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 295) control key when the deadlocks function is
activated. The front left door can also be TUNE knob control
unlocked with the detachable key blade
(p. 164). EXIT
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
06 WARNING doors must be locked from the outside, then
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car the deadlocks function can be temporarily
without first deactivating the deadlocks in switched off, which is carried out in the menu
order to avoid the risk of anyone being system MY CAR. For a detailed description of
locked in. the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 109).
In MY CAR one of the following options can
be selected:
• Activate once: - The combined instru-
ment panel then shows Locks and
alarm Reduced guard and deadlocks

13 Only in combination with alarm.

176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


06 Locks and alarm

are switched off when the car is locked, NOTE Child safety locks - manual activation
only at this time. (Note that the alarm's The child safety locks prevent children from
movement and tilt detectors* are • Remember that the alarm is activated
being able to open a rear door from the
switched off at the same time.) when the car is locked.
inside.
During the next time the engine is started, the • If any of the doors are opened from
the inside then the alarm is triggered. The child safety locks are located on the trail-
system is reset to zero and the combined
ing edge of the rear doors and are only acces-
instrument panel shows the message Locks The above applies if the deadlocks have
not been deactivated temporarily. sible when the doors are open.
and alarm Full guard at which the dead-
locks and the alarm's movement and tilt Activate/deactivate child safety locks
detectors are re-engaged. Related information
• Ask on exit: - Each time the engine is • Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key
switched off, the driver must answer the blade (p. 170)
question Activate Reduced Guard until
engine has started again?.
If the deadlocks function shall be switched
off
– Press OK/MENU and lock the car. (Note
that the alarm's movement and tilt detec-
tors* are switched off at the same time.)
> The next time the engine is started, the
system is reset to zero and the com- Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up 06
bined instrument panel shows the with manual door lock (p. 172).
message Locks and alarm Full – Use the remote control key's detachable
guard at which the deadlocks function key blade (p. 165) to turn the knob.
and the alarm's movement and tilt
detectors are re-engaged. The door is blocked against opening from
the inside.
If the locking system shall not be changed
The door can be opened from both the
– Press EXIT and lock the car. outside and the inside.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177


06 Locks and alarm
||
NOTE Child safety locks - electrical 2. Press the button in the driver's door con-
activation* trol panel.
• A door's knob control only blocks that
The child safety locks prevent children from > The information display shows the
particular door - not both rear doors
being able to open a rear door from the message Rear child lock activated
simultaneously.
inside. and the button's lamp illuminates - the
• Cars with an electric child safety lock locks are active.
do not have a manual child lock. Activation
The electrical child safety locks can be acti- When the electric child safety lock is active
vated/deactivated in all key positions (p. 76) then the rear:
Related information higher than 0. Activation/deactivation can be • windows can only be opened with the
• Child safety locks - electrical activation* performed up to 2 minutes after switching off driver's door control panel
(p. 178) the engine, provided that no door is opened. • doors cannot be opened from inside.
• Locking/unlocking - from the inside The current setting is stored when the engine
(p. 173)
is switched off - if the child safety locks are
activated at engine shutdown, the function
will remain activated the next time the engine
is started.

Related information
• Child safety locks - manual activation
(p. 177)
06 • Locking/unlocking - from the inside
(p. 173)

Control panel driver's door.


1. Start the engine or choose a key position
higher than 0.

178 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


06 Locks and alarm

Alarm NOTE Deactivating a triggered alarm


The alarm is a device that warns in the event – Press the remote control key unlock but-
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in ton or insert the remote control key in the
of e.g. a break-in in the car. the event of movement in the passenger
compartment - air currents are also regis- ignition switch.
Activated alarm is triggered if:
tered. For this reason the alarm is trig-
Related information
• a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is gered if the car is left with a window open
• Alarm - automatic re-arming (p. 180)
opened or if the passenger compartment heater is
• a movement is detected in the passenger
used. • Alarm - remote control key not working
To avoid this: Close the window when (p. 181)
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector*) leaving the car. If the car's integrated pas-
senger compartment heater (or a portable
• the car is raised or towed away (if fitted electric heater) shall be used - direct the
with a tilt detector*) airflow from the air vents so that they are
• the battery's cable is disconnected not pointing upwards in the passenger
compartment. Alternatively, reduced alarm
• the siren is disconnected. level can be used, Reduced alarm level
If there is a fault in the alarm system then the (p. 181).
information display in the combined instru-
ment panel shows a message. In which case,
NOTE
contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. Do not attempt to repair or alter compo-
nents in the alarm system yourself. Any
such attempts may affect the terms of the
insurance. 06

Arming the alarm


– Press the remote control key lock button.

Deactivate the alarm


– Press the remote control key unlock but-
ton.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179


06 Locks and alarm

Alarm indicator Alarm - automatic re-arming Alarm - automatic arming


The alarm indicator shows alarm system Automatic re-arming of the alarm (p. 179) pre- In certain countries the alarm (p. 179) is acti-
(p. 179) status. vents the car being left with the alarm dis- vated after a certain delay if the driver's door
armed unintentionally. was opened and closed but the car was not
re-locked.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control
key (p. 157)(and the alarm is disarmed) but
none of the doors or the tailgate is opened Related information
within 2 minutes, then the alarm is automati- • Alarm signals (p. 181)
cally re-armed. The car is relocked at the
same time.

Related information
• Alarm - automatic arming (p. 180)

Same LED as lock indicator (p. 159).


A red LED on the instrument panel indicates
the alarm system's status:
• LED not lit – Alarm not armed
• The LED flashes once every other second
06 – Alarm is armed
• The LED flashes rapidly after disarming
the alarm (and until the remote control
key is inserted in the ignition switch and
key position I is selected) – Alarm has
been triggered.

180
06 Locks and alarm

Alarm - remote control key not Alarm signals Reduced alarm level
working When the alarm (p. 179) is triggered a siren Reduced guard means that the movement
If the alarm (p. 179) cannot be deactivated sounds and all direction indicators flash. and tilt detectors can be temporarily deacti-
with the remote control key, e.g. if the key's vated.
battery (p. 166) is discharged - the car can be • A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off. The siren has its To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm -
unlocked, disarmed and the engine started as
own battery and works independently of e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during
follows:
the car battery. transport on a car train or car ferry - tempo-
1. Open the left-hand front door with the • The direction indicators flash for 5 rarily deactivate the movement and tilt detec-
detachable key blade (p. 170). minutes or until the alarm is switched off. tors.
> The alarm is triggered, the direction The procedure is the same as with the tem-
indicators flash and the siren sounds. porary disengaging of deadlocks, see Dead-
locks* (p. 176).

Related information
• Alarm (p. 179)
• Alarm indicator (p. 180)

06

2. Insert the remote control key in the igni-


tion switch.
> The alarm is deactivated.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181


06 Locks and alarm

Type approval - remote control key Country/Area


system
Type approval for the remote control key sys- China
tem can be read in the table.

Lock system, standard


Country/Area
EU, China
Hong Kong

Keyless lock system (Keyless drive)


Related information
Country/Area • Remote control key (p. 157)
EU

06

Korea

182
DRIVER SUPPORT
07 Driver support

Electronic stability control (ESC) - Active Yaw Control Driver Steering Recommendation – DSR
general The function checks the driving and brake DSR (Driver Steering Recommendation) helps
Stability system ESC (Electronic Stability force of the wheels individually in order to the driver steer the car in the right direction
Control) helps the driver to avoid skidding and stabilise the car. when there is reduced traction or when the
improves the car's traction. ABS system engages.
Spin Control
The function reduces engine power if the The primary role of the DSR function is to
The activation of the ESC system
drive wheels slip against the underlying sur- help the driver steer in the right direction
during braking may be noticed as a
face in order to maintain stability and traction. when the car is skidding.
throbbing sound. The car may
accelerate slower than expected DSR engages by applying slight torque to the
when the accelerator pedal is depressed. Traction control system steering wheel in the direction in which the
The function is active at low speed and trans- car should be steered to maintain/achieve
fers power from the driving wheel that is spin- maximum possible traction and stabilise the
WARNING
ning to the one that is not. car.
The stability system ESC is supplementary
assistance - it cannot handle all situations Engine drag control - EDC Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA1
in all road conditions. EDC (Engine Drag Control) prevents involun-
Trailer stability assist (p. 307) function is to
The driver always bears responsibility that tary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or
stabilise the car and trailer combination if it
the vehicle is driven safely and that appli- engine braking when driving in low gears on
begins to snake. For more information, see
cable road traffic rules and regulations are slippery road surfaces.
Driving with a trailer (p. 301).
followed.
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
amongst other things, impair the driver's abil- NOTE
The ESC system consists of the following ity to steer the car.
functions: The function is deactivated if the driver
Corner Traction Control - CTC selects Sport mode.
• Active Yaw Control
CTC (Corner Traction Control) compensates
• Spin Control for understeer and allows higher than normal Related information
07
• Traction control system acceleration in a bend without wheelspin on • Electronic stability control (ESC) - opera-
• Engine drag control - EDC the inner wheel, e.g. on an arcing motorway tion (p. 185)
entrance road to quickly reach the prevailing • Electronic stability control (ESC) - sym-
• Corner Traction Control - CTC
traffic speed. bols and messages (p. 186)
• Driver Steering Recommendation – DSR
• Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA

1 Trailer Stability Assist is included in the installation of the Volvo genuine towbar.

184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

Electronic stability control (ESC) - Sport mode is indicated in the com-


operation bined instrument panel by means of
this symbol illuminating with a con-
Selection of level - Sport mode stant glow until the driver deselects
The ESC system is always activated - it can- the function or until the engine is switched off
not be deactivated. - after the next time the engine is started the
ESC system is back in its normal mode once
However, the driver can
again.
select the Sport mode,
which allows for a more Related information
active driving experience. • Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
In Sport mode the system (p. 184)
detects whether the acceler- • Electronic stability control (ESC) - sym-
ator pedal, steering wheel movements and bols and messages (p. 186)
cornering are more active than in normal driv- • MY CAR (p. 109)
ing and then allows controlled skidding with
the rear section up to a certain level before it
intervenes and stabilises the car.
If the driver stops a controlled skid by releas-
ing the accelerator pedal, for example, then
the ESC system intervenes and stabilises the
car.
With Sport mode, maximum traction is also
obtained if the car has become stuck, or
when driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or
deep snow.
07
Proceed as follows to select Sport mode:
Sport mode is selected in the menu system
MY CAR. For a description of the menu sys-
tem, see MY CAR (p. 109).

185
07 Driver support

Electronic stability control (ESC) -


symbols and messages

Table
Symbol Message Specification
ESC Temporarily OFF ESC system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature - the function is
reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.

ESC Service required ESC system disengaged.


• Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

"Message" There is a message in the combined instrument panel - read it!

and

Constant glow for System check when the engine is started.


2 seconds.

07 Flashing light. ESC system is being activated.

Constant glow. Sport mode is activated.


NOTE: The ESC system is not deactivated in this mode - it is partially reduced.

186
07 Driver support

Related information
• Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
(p. 184)
• Electronic stability control (ESC) - opera-
tion (p. 185)

07

187
07 Driver support

Road Sign Information (RSI) WARNING Road sign information (RSI)* -


The road sign information function (RSI – operation
RSI does not work in all situations but is
Road Sign Information) helps the driver to designed merely as a supplementary aid. The road sign information function (RSI –
remember which road signs the car has Road Sign Information) helps the driver to
passed. The driver always bears ultimate responsi- remember which road signs the car has
bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely and that applicable road traffic rules passed. How the function is operated is
and regulations are followed. described below.

Related information
• Road sign information (RSI)* - operation
(p. 188)
• Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations
(p. 190)

Examples of readable speed related2 signs.


The road sign information function gives
information on current speed, that a motor- Recorded speed information3.
way or road is starting/ending and when When RSI has recorded a road sign with an
overtaking is prohibited. If both a sign for imposed speed, the combined instrument
motorway/road for motorised traffic and a panel displays the sign as a symbol.
sign showing the maximum permitted speed
Together with the symbol for
are passed, RSI decides to show the sign
07 the current speed limit, a
symbol for maximum permitted speed.
sign showing that overtaking
is prohibited may also be
displayed where appropriate.

2 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations only show a few examples.
3 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations only show a few examples.

188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

End of restriction or motorway Additional signs Some speeds are applicable


A corresponding road sign is shown in the only after e.g. a specific dis-
combined instrument panel for tance or at a certain time of
approx. 10 seconds in situations where RSI day. The driver's attention is
detects a sign that involves the end of a drawn to the situation by
speed limit - or other speed-related informa- means of a symbol for an
tion, e.g. end of a motorway. additional sign under the
symbol showing speed.
Examples of such signs are:
End of all restrictions. Display of additional information
A symbol for additional sign
in the form of an empty
frame under the combined
instrument panel's speed
Examples of additional signs3.
symbol means that the RSI
Sometimes different speed limits are signpos- has detected an additional
End of motorway. ted for the same road - an additional sign sign with supplementary
then indicates the circumstances under which information for the current speed limit.
the different speeds apply. The road section
may be particularly susceptible to accidents Road sign information On/Off
in rain and/or fog, for example.
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed
Following which, the sign information is hid- only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
den until the next speed-related sign is The speed applicable on an
detected. exit is indicated in certain
markets by means of an
additional sign containing an 07
arrow.
Speed signs linked to this
type of additional sign are displayed only if The combined instrument panel's speed sym-
the driver is using the direction indicator. bol display can be disabled.

3 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations only show a few examples.
}}

189
07 Driver support
||
To deactivate the RSI function: Road sign information (RSI)* - Speed limiter*
• Search for the function in the menu sys- limitations A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a
tem MY CAR MY CAR (p. 109), uncheck The road sign information function (RSI – reverse cruise control - the driver regulates
Road sign information and back out Road Sign Information) helps the driver to the speed using the accelerator pedal but is
with EXIT. remember which road signs the car has prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre-
passed. The function has the following limita- selected/set speed by the speed limiter.
Speed Alert On/Off tions.

The RSI function's camera sensor has limita-


tions just like the human eye. Find out more
about this in the section on the camera sen-
sor limitations (p. 230).
Signs which indirectly provide information on
a prevailing speed limit, e.g. name signs for
towns/districts, are not recorded by the RSI
function.
Here are some other examples of what can
The driver can opt to receive a warning when disrupt the function:
the applicable speed limit is exceeded by Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument
5 km/h or more. This warning is given by the • Faded signs
panel Digital and Analogue.
symbol showing the applicable maximum • Signs positioned on bends
Speed limiter - On/Off.
speed temporarily flashing when this speed is • Rotated or damaged signs
exceeded. Standby mode ceases and the stored
• Concealed or poorly positioned signs
To activate speed warning: speed is resumed.
• Signs completely or partly covered with
frost, snow and/or dirt. Standby mode
• Search for the function in the menu sys-
07 tem MY CAR MY CAR (p. 109), check
Related information Activate and adjust the max. speed.
Speed alert and back out with EXIT.
• Road Sign Information (RSI) (p. 188)
Selected speed
Related information • Road sign information (RSI)* - operation
• Road Sign Information (RSI) (p. 188) (p. 188) Speed limiter active
• Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations
(p. 190)
• MY CAR (p. 109)

190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

Related information Speed limiter* - getting started Switch on and activate


• Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 191) A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a When the speed limiter is active,
• Speed limiter - temporary deactivation reverse cruise control - the driver regulates its symbol (6) is shown in combination with a
and standby mode* (p. 192) the speed using the accelerator pedal but is mark (5) by the set maximum speed in the
prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre- combined instrument panel.
• Speed limiter* - alarm for speed excee-
ded (p. 193) selected/set speed by the speed limiter. Selection and storage of the highest possible
• Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 194) speed in the memory can be made both dur-
ing a journey and while stationary.

While driving
1. Press the steering wheel button to
switch on the speed limiter.
> The symbol (6) for speed limiter illumi-
nates in the combined instrument
panel.
2. When the car is moving at the desired
highest possible speed: Press one of the
steering wheel buttons or until the
Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument combined instrument panel shows a
panel Digital and Analogue.
mark (5) next to the desired maximum
Speed limiter - On/Off. speed.
Standby mode ceases and the stored > The speed limiter is then active and the
speed is resumed. selected max. speed is stored in the
memory.
Standby mode
When stationary 07
Activate and adjust the max. speed.
1. Press the steering wheel button to
Selected speed switch on the speed limiter.
Speed limiter active

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 191


07 Driver support
||
2. Scroll with the button until the com- Speed limiter* - changing speed Speed limiter - temporary
bined instrument panel shows a mark (5) deactivation and standby mode*
by the desired maximum speed. Changing the stored speed A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a
> The speed limiter is then active and the Stored max. speed is changed with short or reverse cruise control - the driver regulates
selected max. speed is stored in the long presses on the or steering wheel the speed using the accelerator pedal but is
memory. button. prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre-
selected/set speed by the speed limiter.
Related information To adjust +/- 5 km/h:
• Speed limiter* (p. 190) • Use short presses - each press gives
+/- 5 km/h.
To adjust +/- 1 km/h:
• Hold down the button and release it at
the required max. speed.
Last press made is stored in the memory.

Related information
• Speed limiter* (p. 190)

Steering wheel keypad and instrument panel Dig-


ital and Analogue.
Speed limiter - On/Off.

Standby mode ceases and the stored


speed is resumed.
07 Standby mode

Activate and adjust the max. speed.

Selected speed

Speed limiter active

192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

Temporary deactivation - standby mode – Depress the accelerator pedal fully. Speed limiter* - alarm for speed
To temporarily deactivate the speed limiter > The combined instrument panel shows exceeded
and set it in standby mode: the stored maximum speed with a col- A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a
– oured mark (5) and the driver can tem- reverse cruise control - the driver regulates
Press .
porarily exceed the set maximum the speed using the accelerator pedal but is
> The combined instrument panel's speed – the mark (5) changes colour prevented from accidentally exceeding a
mark (5) changes colour from GREEN from GREEN to WHITE (Digital) or pre-selected/set speed by the speed limiter.
to WHITE (Digital) or from WHITE to WHITE to GREY (Analogue) during that
GREY (Analogue) and the driver can time. On steep roads the speed limiter's engine
temporarily exceed the set maximum braking effect may be inadequate and the
speed. The speed limiter is automatically reac- selected maximum speed is exceeded. The
tivated after the accelerator pedal is driver is alerted about this with an acoustic
The speed limiter is reactivated with released and the car's speed is slowed signal. The signal is active until the driver has
one press on . The mark (5) then down to below the selected/stored slowed to below the selected maximum
changes colour from WHITE to GREEN maximum speed - the mark (5) speed.
(Digital) or GREY to WHITE (Analogue) changes colour from WHITE to GREEN
and the car's maximum speed is lim- (Digital) or GREY to WHITE (Analogue)
NOTE
ited again. and the car's maximum speed is again
limited. The alarm is only activated after 5 seconds
Temporary deactivation with the if the speed has been exceeded by at least
accelerator pedal Related information 3 km/h provided that none of the buttons
The speed limiter can also be set in standby • Speed limiter* (p. 190) or has been depressed during the
mode with the accelerator pedal, e.g. for rap- last half minute.
idly accelerating the car out of a situation:
Related information
• Speed limiter* (p. 190)
07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 193


07 Driver support

Speed limiter* - deactivation Cruise control*


A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in
the speed using the accelerator pedal but is more relaxing driving on motorways and long,
prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre- straight roads with regular traffic flows.
selected/set speed by the speed limiter.
Overview
To deactivate the speed limiter:
– Press the steering wheel button .
> The combined instrument panel's
(p. 190) symbol for the speed limiter
and the mark for the set speed are The steering wheel buttons and combined instru-
extinguished. The selected and stored ment panel in cars with speed limiter4.
speed are thus deleted from the mem-
Cruise control - On/Off.
ory and cannot be resumed with the
button. Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
The driver can then use the accelerator
pedal to choose a speed without limi- Standby mode
tation. The steering wheel buttons and combined instru-
ment panel in cars without speed limiter4. Activate and adjust the speed.
Related information
Selected speed (GREY = Standby mode).
• Speed limiter* (p. 190)
Cruise control active - WHITE symbol
(GREY = Standby mode).

07

4 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.

194 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

WARNING Cruise control* - managing speed


It is possible to activate, set and change the
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and inter- stored speed.
vene when the cruise control is not main-
taining a suitable speed and/or suitable Activating and setting the speed
distance.
The driver always bears ultimate responsi-
bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely.

Related information
• Cruise control* - managing speed The steering wheel buttons and display in cars
(p. 195) with speed limiter5.
• Cruise control* temporary deactivation
To start the cruise control:
and standby mode (p. 196)
• Cruise control* - resume set speed • Press the steering wheel button for
(p. 197) The steering wheel buttons and display in cars CRUISE (without speed limiter) or
without speed limiter5. (with speed limiter).
• Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 198)
> The cruise control symbol (6) in the com-
• Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)
bined instrument panel illuminates -
Cruise control is in standby mode.
To activate cruise control:
• At the required speed - press the steering
wheel button or .
> The current speed is stored in the mem- 07
ory and the combined instrument panel's
marking (5) illuminates at the selected
speed and the symbol (6) changes from
GREY to WHITE - the car then follows the
stored speed.

5 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 195


07 Driver support
||
NOTE NOTE Cruise control* temporary
deactivation and standby mode
Cruise Control cannot be enabled at If any of the Cruise Control buttons are
speeds below 30 km/h. held depressed for several minutes then it The function can be temporarily deactivated
is blocked and deactivated. To be able to and set in standby mode.
reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be
Changing the stored speed stopped and the engine restarted. Temporary deactivation - standby mode
Stored speed is changed with short or long
presses on the or steering wheel but- Related information
ton. • Cruise control* (p. 194)
To adjust +/- 5 km/h:
• Use short presses - each press gives
+/- 5 km/h.
To adjust +/- 1 km/h:
• Hold down the button and release it at
the required speed.
Last press made is stored in the memory.
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars
If speed is increased using the accelerator without speed limiter6.
pedal prior to pressing the / button,
then it is the car's current speed when the
button is pressed that is stored.
A temporary increase in speed with the accel-
erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the cruise control setting - the car
07 returns to the last stored speed when the
accelerator pedal is released.

6 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.

196 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

• the driver maintains speed higher than Cruise control* - resume set speed
the stored speed for longer than The cruise control (p. 194) (CC – Cruise
1 minute. Control) helps the driver to maintain an even
The driver must then regulate the speed. speed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accel- After temporary deactivation and standby
erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not mode (p. 196) it is possible to resume the set
affect the setting - the car returns to the last speed.
stored speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.

Automatic standby mode


Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars set in standby mode if:
with speed limiter6.
• wheels lose traction
To temporarily disengage cruise control and
set it in standby mode: • engine speed is too low/high

• • speed falls below approx. 30 km/h.


Press .
The driver must then regulate the speed.
> The combined instrument panel's
marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour Related information
from WHITE to GREY - Cruise control is • Cruise control* (p. 194)
temporarily disengaged. • Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 195)
Standby mode due to driver intervention • Cruise control* - resume set speed
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and (p. 197)
set automatically in standby mode if: • Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 198)
• the foot brake is used 07

• the clutch pedal is depressed for longer


than 1 minute7
• the gear lever/selector is moved to N
position

6 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
7 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 197


07 Driver support
||
> The combined instrument panel's Cruise control* - deactivate
marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour
from GREY to WHITE - the car then fol- How it is deactivated is described here.
lows the last stored speed.
NOTE
A marked speed increase may occur once
the speed has been resumed by selecting
.

Related information
• Cruise control* (p. 194)
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars
without speed limiter8. • Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 195)
• Cruise control* temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 196)
• Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 198)

07 The steering wheel buttons and display in cars


with speed limiter8.
To reactivate the cruise control from standby
mode:
• Press the steering wheel button .

8 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.

198 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

the memory and cannot be resumed with the Adaptive cruise control (ACC)*
button. The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
Related information even speed combined with a pre-selected
• Cruise control* (p. 194) time interval to the vehicle ahead.
• Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 195)
The adaptive cruise control provides a more
• Cruise control* temporary deactivation
relaxing driving experience on long journeys
and standby mode (p. 196)
on motorways and long straight main roads in
• Cruise control* - resume set speed smooth traffic flows.
(p. 197)
The driver sets the desired speed (p. 203)
and time interval to the car in front. When the
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars radar detector detects a slower vehicle in
without speed limiter9. front of the car, the speed is automatically
adapted to that. When the road is clear again
the car returns to the selected speed.
If the adaptive cruise control is switched off
or set to standby mode and the car comes
too close to a vehicle in front, then the driver
is warned instead by a Distance Alert (p. 214)
about the short distance.

The steering wheel buttons and display in cars 07


with speed limiter9.
The cruise control is switched off with the
steering wheel button (1) or by switching off
the engine - the stored speed is deleted from

9 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 199


07 Driver support
||
WARNING Related information Adaptive cruise control* - function
• Adaptive cruise control* - function
The driver must always be observant with (p. 200)
regard to the traffic conditions and inter-
vene when the adaptive cruise control is • Adaptive cruise control* - overview
not maintaining a suitable speed or suita- (p. 202)
ble distance. • Adaptive cruise control* - managing
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle speed (p. 203)
all traffic, weather and road conditions. • Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval
Read all the sections about the adaptive (p. 204)
cruise control in the owner's manual in • Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
order to learn about its limitations, of deactivation, and standby mode (p. 205)
which the driver should be aware before it
is used. • Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
another vehicle (p. 206)
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and • Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate Function overview10.
speed, even when the adaptive cruise con- (p. 206) Warning lamp - braking by driver required
trol is being used. • Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue assis-
Steering wheel (p. 83) keypad
tance (p. 206)
IMPORTANT • Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise Radar sensor (p. 209)
control functionality (p. 208)
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise
components must only be performed at a • Radar sensor (p. 209) control system and a coordinated spacing
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop • Radar sensor - limitations (p. 209) system.
is recommended.
• Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing
and action (p. 211)
Automatic gearbox
07 Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced
• Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
messages (p. 212)
functionality with the adaptive cruise control's
Queue assistance (p. 206) function.

10 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model.

200 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

WARNING The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the Warning lamp - braking by driver
vehicle ahead in the same lane according to required
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision what the driver set for time interval (p. 204). If
avoidance system. The driver must inter- Adaptive cruise control has a braking
the radar sensor cannot see any vehicle in capacity that is equivalent to approx. 40% of
vene if the system does not detect a vehi-
cle in front. front then the car will instead maintain the the car's braking capacity.
speed set and stored by the driver. This also
The adaptive cruise control does not brake takes place if the speed of the vehicle in front
for humans or animals, and not for small
exceeds the stored speed.
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcy-
cles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary
vehicles and objects. The adaptive cruise control aims to control
the speed in a smooth way. In situations that
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for demand sudden braking the driver must
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
brake himself/herself. This applies with large
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot
of water or slush on the road, in heavy differences in speed, or if the vehicle in front
rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding brakes heavily. Due to limitations in the radar
roads or on slip roads. sensor (p. 209) braking may come unexpect-
edly or not at all.
The distance to the vehicle ahead is mainly The adaptive cruise control can be activated
1. Collision warning system warning lamp and
measured by a radar sensor. The cruise con- to follow another vehicle at speeds from warning sound12.
trol function regulates the speed with acceler- 30 km/h11 up to 200 km/h. If the speed falls
ation and braking. It is normal for the brakes below 30 km/h or if the engine speed If the car needs to be braked more heavily
to emit a low sound when they are being becomes too low, the cruise control is set in than the adaptive cruise control capacity and
used by the adaptive cruise control. standby mode at which automatic braking the driver does not brake, then the warning
ceases - the driver must then take over him- lamp and warning sound from the Collision
WARNING self/herself to maintain a safe distance to the warning system (p. 224) are used in order to
vehicle ahead. alert the driver that immediate intervention is
The brake pedal moves when the adaptive required. 07
cruise control brakes. Do not rest your foot
beneath the brake pedal - it may then
become trapped.

11 Queue Assist (p. 206) in cars with automatic gearbox can operate in the range 0-200 km/h.
12 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
}}

201
07 Driver support
||
NOTE Adaptive cruise control* - overview Time distance
Operation of the adaptive cruise control
The warning lamp may be difficult to see in ACC is active at the GREEN symbol
strong sunlight or when wearing sun- (p. 199) and steering wheel keypad varies
(WHITE = standby mode).
glasses. depending on whether or not the car is equip-
ped with speed limiter (p. 190)13. Adaptive cruise control without Speed
limiter
WARNING Adaptive cruise control with Speed
The adaptive cruise control only warns of limiter
vehicles which the radar sensor has
detected. Hence the warning may not be
given, or it may be given with a certain
delay. Do not wait for a warning without
braking when so required.

Steep roads and/or heavy load


Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control
is primarily intended for use when driving on
level road surfaces. It may have difficulty in
keeping the correct distance from the vehicle
ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes, Standby mode ceases and the stored
with a heavy load or with a trailer - in which speed is resumed.
Cruise control - On/Off.
case, be extra attentive and ready to slow Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.
down. Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed. Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Related information
Standby mode Activate and adjust the speed.
• Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)
07 • Adaptive cruise control* - overview Time interval - Increase/decrease. (Not used)
(p. 202)
Activate and adjust the speed. Green marking at stored speed (WHITE =
• Cruise control* (p. 194)
standby mode).
Green marking at stored speed (WHITE =
standby mode).

13 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.

202 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

Time distance Adaptive cruise control* - managing At the same time a speed
speed range is marked:
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol
(WHITE = standby mode). To start the ACC:
Related information • Press the steering wheel button -a
• Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199) similar WHITE symbol illuminates in the
• Adaptive cruise control* - managing combined instrument panel (8) which • the higher speed with GREEN marking is
speed (p. 203) shows that the adaptive cruise control is the pre-programmed speed
in standby mode (p. 205).
• Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval • the lower speed is the speed of the vehi-
(p. 204) To activate ACC: cle in front.
• Adaptive cruise control* - temporary • At the required speed - press the steering Changing the stored speed
deactivation, and standby mode (p. 205) wheel button or .
Stored speed is changed with short or long
• Cruise control* (p. 194) > The current speed is stored in the mem-
ory, the combined instrument panel presses on the or steering wheel but-
shows a "magnifying glass" (6) around ton.
the stored speed for a second or so and To adjust +/- 5 km/h:
its marking changes from WHITE to
GREEN.
• Use short presses - each press gives
+/- 5 km/h.
When this symbol changes colour
To adjust +/- 1 km/h:
from WHITE to GREEN, ACC is
active and the car maintains the • Hold down the button and release it at
stored speed. the required speed.
Only when the symbol shows Last press made is stored in the memory.
an image of another vehicle If speed is increased using the accelerator
is the distance to the vehicle pedal prior to pressing the / button, 07
in front controlled by ACC. then it is the car's current speed when the
button is pressed that is stored.
A temporary increase in speed with the accel-
erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the setting - the car returns to the last

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 203


07 Driver support
||
stored speed when the accelerator pedal is Adaptive cruise control* - set time NOTE
released. interval
Only use the time intervals permitted by
Different time intervals to the local traffic regulations.
NOTE
vehicle in front can be If the adaptive cruise control does not
If any of the adaptive cruise control but- selected and shown in the appear to react when activated, this may
tons are held depressed for several be because the time distance to the vehi-
minutes then the function is blocked and combined instrument panel
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the cle in front is preventing an increase in
deactivated. To be able to reactivate it, the speed.
car must be stopped and the engine more lines the longer the
restarted. time interval. One line corre- The higher the speed the longer the calcu-
sponds to approximately 1 second to the lated distance in metres for a given time
In certain situations it cannot be reactiva- interval.
ted - in which case, the combined instru- vehicle in front, 5 lines
ment panel (p. 212) shows Adaptive approximately 3 seconds.
cruise control unavailable. Read more how speed is handled (p. 203).
To set/change the time distance:
• Turn the steering wheel button set's Related information
Related information • Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)
thumbwheel (or use the / buttons for
• Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)
cars without Speed limiters). • Adaptive cruise control* - overview
• Adaptive cruise control* - overview
At low speed, when the distances are short, (p. 202)
(p. 202)
the adaptive cruise control increases the time • Cruise control* (p. 194)
• Cruise control* (p. 194) interval slightly.
The adaptive cruise control allows the time
interval to vary noticeably in certain situations
in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle
in front smoothly and comfortably.
07 Note that a short time interval only allows the
driver a short time to react and take action if
any unforeseen traffic problem should arise.
The same symbol is also shown when Dis-
tance Alert (p. 214) is activated.

204 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

Adaptive cruise control* - temporary • the driver maintains speed higher than • speed has fallen below 30 km/h15
deactivation, and standby mode the stored speed for longer than
1 minute.
• wheels lose traction
The adaptive cruise control can be temporar- • brake temperature is high
ily deactivated and set in standby mode. The driver must then regulate the speed.
• the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet
Temporary deactivation/standby mode - A temporary increase in speed with the accel- snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).
erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
with speed limiter For more information on symbols, messages
affect the setting - the car returns to the last
To temporarily disengage adaptive cruise and their meaning, see section Symbols and
stored speed when the accelerator pedal is
control and set it in standby mode: messages in the display (p. 212).
released.
• Press the steering wheel button For more information, see the sections Man- Resume set speed
This symbol and stored speed mark- aging speed (p. 203) and Overtaking another Adaptive cruise control in standby mode is
ing then changes colour from vehicle (p. 206). reactivated with one press on the steering
GREEN to WHITE. wheel button - the speed is then set to the
Automatic standby mode last stored speed.
Temporary deactivation/standby mode - The adaptive cruise control is dependent on
without speed limiter other systems, e.g. Stability system ESC NOTE
To temporarily disengage adaptive cruise (p. 184). If any of these systems stops work-
control and set it in standby mode: ing, the adaptive cruise control is deactivated A marked speed increase may occur once
automatically. the speed has been resumed by selecting
• Press the steering wheel button .
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal
Standby mode due to driver intervention will sound and the message Adaptive cruise
The adaptive cruise control is temporarily dis- control cancelled is shown in the combined Related information
engaged and set automatically in standby instrument panel. The driver must then inter- • Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)
mode if: vene and adapt the speed and distance to • Adaptive cruise control* - overview
the vehicle ahead. (p. 202)
• the foot brake is used
07
• the clutch pedal is depressed for longer An automatic deactivation can be due to: • Cruise control* (p. 194)
than 1 minute14 • the driver opens the door
• the gear selector is moved to N position • the driver takes off his seatbelt
(automatic gearbox)
• engine speed is too low/high

14 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.
15 Does not apply to a car with Queue Assist - it can go all the way down to 0 km/h.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 205


07 Driver support

Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue
another vehicle assistance
ACC can also assist during overtaking. Keypad with Speed limiter Queue assistance also provides the adaptive
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged cruise control with enhanced functionality at
When the car is following another vehicle and with a short press of the steering wheel but- speeds lower than 30 km/h.
the driver indicates an impending overtaking ton . The set speed is cleared and cannot
manoeuvre with the direction indicator16, the In cars with automatic gearbox the adaptive
be resumed with the button.
adaptive cruise control helps to briefly accel- cruise control is supplemented with the
erate the car towards the vehicle in front. Keypad without Speed limiter queue assistance function (also referred to as
A short press on the steering wheel button "Queue Assist").
This function is active at speeds
above 70 km/h. sets the adaptive cruise control in standby Queue assistance has the following functions:
mode. With a further short press it is deacti-
Read more about the different time intervals
vated. The set speed is cleared and cannot
• Extended speed range - also at lower
(p. 204) to the vehicle in front. than 30 km/h and at stationary
be resumed with the button.
Read more about how you manage the speed • Change of target
(p. 203). Related information • Automatic braking ceases when station-
• Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199) ary
WARNING • Adaptive cruise control* - overview Note that the lowest programmable speed for
Be aware that this function can be acti- (p. 202) the adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h - even
vated in more situations other than during • Cruise control* (p. 194) though the cruise control is capable of follow-
overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator ing another vehicle down to a standstill, a
is used to indicate a change of lane or exit lower speed cannot be selected.
to another road - the car will then acceler-
ate briefly. Learn more about how you manage the
speed (p. 199) and different time intervals to
the vehicle in front (p. 204).
Related information
07
• Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)
• Adaptive cruise control* - overview
(p. 202)
• Cruise control* (p. 194)

16 On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.

206 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

Extended speed range NOTE WARNING


The Queue Assist function can keep the When the adaptive cruise control is follow-
NOTE car stationary for a maximum of 4 minutes ing a vehicle ahead at speeds in excess of
In order to activate the cruise control the - then the brakes release. 30 km/h and the target is changed from a
driver's door must be closed and the driver vehicle ahead to a stationary vehicle, the
See more information under the heading
must be wearing the seatbelt. cruise control will ignore the stationary
"Termination of automatic braking at a
vehicle and instead select the stored
standstill".
speed.
With an automatic gearbox, the adaptive
cruise control can follow another vehicle Change of target
• The driver must intervene him/herself
and brake.
within the range 0-200 km/h.

NOTE Automatic standby mode with change


of target
Activation of the cruise control below
30 km/h requires a vehicle in front within a The adaptive cruise control is disengaged
reasonable distance. and set in standby mode:
• when the speed is below 5 km/h and
For shorter stops in connection with inching cruise control is not sure whether the tar-
in slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is get object is a stationary vehicle or some
automatically resumed if the stops do not If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then other object, e.g. a speed bump.
there may be stationary traffic in front.
exceed approx. 3 seconds - if it takes longer • when the speed is below 5 km/h and the
before the car in front starts moving again When the adaptive cruise control is following vehicle in front turns off so the cruise
then the cruise control is set in standby mode another vehicle at speeds lower than control no longer has a vehicle to follow.
(p. 205) with automatic braking. The driver 30 km/h and changes target from a moving to
must then reactivate it in one of the following a stationary vehicle, the cruise control will Termination of automatic braking at a
ways: slow down for the stationary vehicle. standstill
In the following situations, queue assistance 07
• Press the steering wheel button . stops automatic braking at a standstill:
or • the driver opens the door
• Depress the accelerator pedal. • the driver takes off his seatbelt.
> The cruise control will then resume fol- This means that the brakes are released and
lowing the vehicle in front. the car will start to roll - the driver must there-

}}

207
07 Driver support
||
fore intervene and brake the car himself in Related information Adaptive cruise control* - switch
order to maintain its position. • Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199) cruise control functionality
• Adaptive cruise control* - overview
IMPORTANT (p. 202) Changing from ACC to CC
A symbol for active cruise control is shown in
Queue Assist can keep the car stationary • Cruise control* (p. 194)
the combined instrument panel:
for a maximum of 4 minutes - then the
brakes release.
The driver's attention is drawn to this over CC ACC
several stages, with increasing intensity: Cruise Control Adaptive Cruise
1. Acoustic alarm (pinging) and text mes- Control
sage.
2. A warning lamp in the windscreen also
starts to flash.
Cruise control Adaptive cruise control
3. "Stabbing" braking occurs.
For more information on symbols, mes-
sages and their meaning, see the section With one press of the button the adaptive ele-
Symbols and messages in the dis- ment (spacing system) in the adaptive cruise
play (p. 212). control (p. 199) is deactivated, at which point
the car only follows the set/stored speed.
Queue assistance releases the foot brake and • Hold down the steering wheel button
is set to standby mode in these situations as - the combined instrument panel's sym-
well: bol changes from to .
• the driver puts his/her foot on the brake > This activates Cruise Control CC.
pedal
07 • the gear selector is moved to P, N or R WARNING
position
The car no longer brakes automatically
• the driver sets the cruise control in after switching from ACC to CC - it merely
standby mode follows the set speed.
• the parking brake is applied.

208 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

Changing back from CC to ACC Radar sensor Radar sensor - limitations


Switch off the cruise control (CC) with 1-2 The function of the radar sensor is to detect A radar sensor (p. 209) has certain limitations
presses on the button. The next time the cars or larger vehicles in the same direction, - due to its limited field of vision for example.
system is switched on it is the adaptive cruise in the same lane.
control (ACC) that is activated. The capacity of the adaptive cruise control to
The radar sensor is used by the following detect a vehicle in front is significantly
Related information functions: reduced if:
• Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199) • Distance Warning* • the speed of vehicles in front is signifi-
• Adaptive cruise control* - overview • Adaptive cruise control* cantly different from your own speed
(p. 202) • its radar sensor becomes blocked - e.g.
• Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
• Adaptive cruise control* - temporary Pedestrian Detection* in heavy rain or slush, or if other objects
deactivation, and standby mode (p. 205) have collected in front of the radar sen-
• Cruise control* (p. 194) sor.
IMPORTANT
In the event of visible damage to the car's NOTE
grille, or if you suspect that the radar sen-
sor may be damaged: Keep the surface in front of the radar sen-
sor clean.
• Contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Field of vision
The function may completely or partially
disappear - or malfunction - if the grille, The radar sensor has a limited field of vision.
the radar sensor or its bracket is damaged In some situations another vehicle is not
or has loosened. detected, or the detection is made later than
expected.

Modification of the radar sensor could result


in it being illegal to use. 07

Related information
• Radar sensor - limitations (p. 209)
• Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)
• Collision warning system* (p. 224)
• Distance Warning* (p. 214)

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 209


07 Driver support
||
WARNING WARNING
The driver must always be observant with Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
regard to the traffic conditions and inter- avoidance system. The driver must inter-
vene when the adaptive cruise control is vene if the system does not detect a vehi-
not maintaining a suitable speed or suita- cle in front.
ble distance.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle for humans or animals, and not for small
all traffic, weather and road conditions. vehicles such as bicycles and motorcy-
cles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary
Read all the sections about the adaptive
vehicles and objects.
cruise control in the owner's manual in
order to learn about its limitations, of Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
which the driver should be aware before it example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
is used. junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot
of water or slush on the road, in heavy
The driver always bears responsibility for
rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding
maintaining the correct distance and
roads or on slip roads.
speed, even when the adaptive cruise con-
trol is being used.

Related information
WARNING • Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)
Accessories or other objects such as auxil- • Collision warning system* (p. 224)
ACC field of vision. iary lamps must not be fitted in front of the
grille.
• Distance Warning* (p. 214)
Sometimes the radar sensor is late at
detecting vehicles at close distances -
e.g. a vehicle that drives in between the
car and vehicles in front.
07
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
vehicles not driving in the centre of the
lane can remain undetected.
In bends the radar sensor may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle
from view.

210 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing sensor (p. 209) cannot detect other vehicles sion Warning with Auto Brake (p. 224) are
and action in front of the car. working.
This message indicates that neither of the The following table presents examples of
If the combined instrument panel shows the
functions for Distance Alert (p. 214) or Colli- possible causes for a message being shown
message Radar blocked See manual then it
along with the appropriate action:
means that the adaptive cruise control's radar

Cause Action
The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.

Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.

Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy road
radar signals. surface.

The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer
blocked.

Related information
• Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)
• Adaptive cruise control* - overview
(p. 202)
• Cruise control* (p. 194)

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 211


07 Driver support

Adaptive cruise control* - symbols are some examples - follow the recommenda-
and messages tion given if appropriate:
Sometimes the adaptive cruise control may
display a symbol and/or text message. Here

SymbolA Message Specification


The symbol is WHITE Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode (p. 205).

The symbol is GREEN The car maintains the stored speed.

Standard cruise control is selected manually.

Set ESC to Normal to ena- The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until ESC has been set in Normal mode - Stability
ble Cruise system (p. 184).

Adaptive cruise control The adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed himself.
cancelled

Adaptive cruise control The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.


unavailable This could be due to:
• brake temperature is high
• the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.
For more information about fault tracing, see section Fault tracing and action (p. 211)
07
Radar blocked See manual The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged.
• The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of
heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
The driver can then choose to switch to normal Cruise control (p. 194) (CC) - a text message pro-
vides information on appropriate alternatives.
Read more about radar sensor limitations (p. 209).

212 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

SymbolA Message Specification


Adaptive cruise control The adaptive cruise control is disengaged.
Service required
• Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Press brake to hold vehicle The car is at a standstill and the adaptive cruise control will release the foot brake, which is why
+ acoustic alarm + warning the car may start rolling soon.
light in windscreen + "pulling"
• The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the
brakesB driver depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.

Below 30 km/h Lead vehi- Shown in the event of attempts to activate the adaptive cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h
cle requiredB without a vehicle in front within the activation distance.
A The symbols are schematic.
B Only with Queue Assist.

Related information
• Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)
• Adaptive cruise control* - overview
(p. 202)
• Cruise control* (p. 194)

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 213


07 Driver support

Distance Warning* NOTE tion is operated in the car's menu system MY


The Distance Warning function (Distance CAR (p. 109) - once there, search for the
Distance warning is deactivated during the Distance Alert function.
Alert) warns the driver if the time interval to time the adaptive cruise control is active.
the vehicle ahead becomes too short.
Set time interval
Distance Warning is active at speeds above WARNING
30 km/h and only reacts to vehicles driving in
front of the car, in the same direction. No dis- Distance warning only reacts if the dis-
tance information is provided for oncoming, tance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than
the preset value - the speed of the driver's
slow or stationary vehicles. vehicle is not affected.

Operation

Controls and symbol for time interval.


Time interval - Increase/decrease.

Time interval - On.


Different time intervals to the
Orange-coloured warning lamp17. vehicle in front can be
selected and shown in the
An orange-coloured warning lamp in the
combined instrument panel
windscreen illuminates with a constant glow if
Press the button in the centre console to as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
07 the distance to the vehicle in front is shorter
switch the function on or off. The function is more lines the longer the
than the set time interval.
switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the time interval. One line corre-
button. sponds to approximately 1 second to the
Some combinations of the selected equip- vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately 3 sec-
ment leave no vacant space for a button in onds.
the centre console - in which case, the func-

17 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

The same symbol is also shown when adap- Distance Warning* - limitations
tive cruise control (p. 199) is activated.
This function, which uses the same radar
NOTE sensor as Adaptive cruise control (p. 199) and
Collision warning with auto brake (p. 224),
The higher the speed the longer the calcu- has certain limitations.
lated distance in metres for a given time
interval.
NOTE
The set time interval is also used by the
function adaptive cruise control (p. 200). Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia-
tions in light intensity, as well as wearing
Only use the time intervals permitted by sunglasses, could mean that the warning
local traffic regulations. light in the windscreen cannot be seen.
Poor weather or winding roads could
Related information affect the radar sensor's capacity to detect
• Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 215) vehicles in front.
• Distance Warning* - symbols and mes- The size of other vehicles could also affect
sages (p. 216) detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This
could mean that the warning lamp illumi-
nates at a shorter distance than the setting
or that the warning is temporarily absent.
Extremely high speeds can also cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance
than that set due to limitations in sensor
range.

For further information on radar sensor limita-


tions, see Radar sensor - limitations (p. 209) 07
and Collision warning system* - operation
(p. 228).

Related information
• Distance Warning* (p. 214)
• Distance Warning* - symbols and mes-
sages (p. 216)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 215


07 Driver support

Distance Warning* - symbols and instrument panel if the function is reduced


messages due to its limitations (p. 215).

The function has certain symbols and mes-


sages that can be shown in the combined

SymbolA Message Specification


Radar blocked See Distance Warning temporarily disengaged.
manual Radar sensor (p. 209) is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of
heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
For information, see Radar sensor - limitations (p. 209).

Collision warning Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake (p. 229) fully or partially disengaged.
Service required Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A The symbols are schematic.

07

216 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

City Safety™ IMPORTANT City Safety™ - function


City Safety™ is a function for helping the City Safety™ detects the traffic in front of the
Maintenance and replacement of City
driver to avoid a collision when driving in Safety™ components must only be per- car with a laser sensor (p. 221) fitted in the
queues, amongst other things, when changes formed by a workshop - an authorised top edge of the windscreen. If there is an
in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in Volvo workshop is recommended. imminent risk of collision, City Safety™ will
attention, could lead to an incident. automatically brake the car, which may be
experienced as sudden braking.
The City Safety™ function is active at speeds WARNING
under 50 km/h and it helps the driver by auto-
City Safety™ does not engage in all driv-
matically braking the car in the event of immi- ing situations or traffic, weather or road
nent risk of collision with vehicles in front, conditions.
should the driver not react in time by braking
City Safety™ does not react to vehicles
and/or steering away.
driving in a different direction from the car,
City Safety™ is activated in situations where to small vehicles and motorcycles or to
the driver should have started braking earlier, people and animals.
which is why it cannot help the driver in every City Safety™ can prevent collision at a
situation. speed difference of less than 15 km/h - at
a higher speed difference, it is only possi-
City Safety™ is designed to be activated as ble to reduce collision speed. In order to
late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary obtain full brake function, the driver must
intervention. depress the brake pedal.
City Safety™ must not be used as an excuse Never wait for City Safety™ to engage.
for the driver to change his/her driving style. If The driver always bears responsibility for
the driver solely relies on City Safety™ to do maintaining the proper distance and
the braking, there might be a risk of a colli- speed.
sion sooner or later.
The driver or passengers normally only notice Related information 07
City Safety™ if a situation arises where the • City Safety™ - limitations (p. 219)
car is extremely close to being in a collision. • City Safety™ - function (p. 217)
If the car is also equipped with Collision • City Safety™ - operation (p. 218)
Warning with Auto Brake* (p. 224) these two • City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 221)
systems complement each other. • City Safety™ - symbols and messages
(p. 223)

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 217


07 Driver support
||
When the function is activated and brakes, City Safety™ - operation
the combined instrument panel shows a mes- City Safety™ is a function for helping the
sage (p. 223) to the effect that the function driver to avoid a collision when driving in
is/has been active. queues, amongst other things, when changes
in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in
NOTE attention, could lead to an incident.
When City Safety™ brakes, the brake On and Off
lights come on.

NOTE
Related information
• City Safety™ (p. 217) The City Safety™ function is activated
automatically when the engine is started.
Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window18. • City Safety™ - operation (p. 218)
If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h in relation • City Safety™ - limitations (p. 219) In certain situations, it may advisable to disa-
to the vehicle in front then City Safety™ can ble City Safety™, e.g. where leafy branches
completely prevent a collision. could sweep over the bonnet and/or wind-
City Safety™ activates a short, sharp braking screen.
and stops the car in normal circumstances, City Safety™ handled in the menu system
just behind the vehicle in front. For most dri- MY CAR (p. 109) and after starting the engine
vers this is well outside normal driving style the function can be deactivated as follows:
and may be experienced as being uncomfort-
able. • Search in MY CAR for Driver support
system and select the Off option at City
If the difference in speed between the vehi- Safety.
cles is greater than 15 km/h then City
However, the function will be enabled the
Safety™ may not prevent the collision on its
07 next time the engine is started, regardless
own. To obtain full brake force, the driver
of whether the system was enabled or
must depress the brake pedal. This could
disabled when the engine was switched
then make it possible to prevent a collision,
off.
even at speed differences above 15 km/h.

18 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

218
07 Driver support

WARNING City Safety™ - limitations tems will provide best possible braking force
The sensor in City Safety™ is designed to with maintained stability.
The laser sensor (p. 221) emits laser light
even when City Safety™ is disabled man- detect cars and other large vehicles in front of When your own car is reversing, City Safety™
ually. the car irrespective of whether it is day or is temporarily deactivated.
night.
City Safety™ is not activated at low speeds -
To enable City Safety™ again: However, the function does have some limita- under 4 km/h, which is why the system does
tions. not intervene in situations where a vehicle in
• Follow the same procedure as for disa-
bling, but select the On option. front is being approached very slowly, e.g.
The sensor's limitations mean that City
when parking.
Safety™ has poorer functionality - or none at
Related information Driver commands are always prioritised,
all - in e.g. heavy snowfall or rain, dense fog,
• City Safety™ (p. 217)
dust storms or white-out situations. Misting, which is why City Safety™ does not intervene
• City Safety™ - limitations (p. 219) dirt, ice or snow on the windscreen may also in situations where the driver is steering or
• City Safety™ - symbols and messages disrupt the function. accelerating in a clear manner, even if a colli-
(p. 223) sion is unavoidable.
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for
projecting load, or accessories such as auxili- When City Safety™ has prevented a collision
ary lamps and bull bars that are higher than with a stationary object the car remains sta-
the bonnet limit the function. tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the
car is braked for a vehicle in front that is mov-
The laser light from the sensor in City
ing, then speed is reduced to the same speed
Safety™ measures how the light is reflected.
as that maintained by the vehicle in front.
The sensor cannot detect objects with low
reflection capacity. The rear sections of the On a car with manual gearbox the engine
vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently stops when City Safety™ has stopped the
thanks to the number plate and rear light car, unless the driver manages to depress the
reflectors. clutch pedal beforehand.
07
On slippery road surfaces the braking dis-
tance is extended, which may reduce the
capacity of City Safety™ to avoid a collision.
In such situations the ABS19 and ESC20 sys-

19 (Anti-lock Braking System) - Anti-lock braking system.


20 (Electronic Stability Control) - Stability system.
}}

219
07 Driver support
||
NOTE Cause Action IMPORTANT
• Keep the windscreen surface in front The windscreen sur- Clean the wind- If there are cracks, scratches or stone
of the laser sensor (p. 221) free from chips in the windscreen in front of either of
face in front of the screen surface in the laser sensor's "windows" and they
ice, snow and dirt. For an illustration of
laser sensor is dirty or front of the sensor cover a surface of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm
sensor location, see City Safety™ -
covered with ice or from dirt, ice and (or larger), then a workshop must be con-
function (p. 217).
snow. snow. tacted for replacement of the windscreen -
• Do not affix or mount anything on the an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
windscreen in front of the laser sensor The laser sensor field Remove the mended. For an illustration of sensor loca-
• Remove ice and snow from the bonnet of vision is blocked. blocking object. tion, see City Safety™ - function (p. 217).
- snow and ice must not exceed a Failure to take action may result in
height of 5 cm. reduced performance for City Safety™.
To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
Fault tracing and action reduced operation for City Safety™, the
If the message (p. 223) Windscreen following also applies:
sensors blocked See manual is shown in • Volvo recommends that you do not
the combined instrument panel it indicates repair cracks, scratches or stone chips
that the laser sensor is blocked and cannot in the area in front of the laser sensor -
detect vehicles in front of the car. This means instead, the whole windscreen should
that City Safety™ is not operational. be replaced.
The Windscreen sensors blocked See • Before replacing a windscreen, con-
tact an authorised Volvo workshop to
manual message is not shown for all situa-
verify that the correct windscreen is
tions in which the laser sensor is blocked.
ordered and fitted.
The driver must therefore be diligent about
keeping the windscreen and area in front of • The same type or Volvo-approved
the laser sensor clean. windscreen wipers must be fitted dur-
07 ing replacement.
The following table presents possible causes
for the message being shown, along with
suggestions for appropriate action. Related information
• City Safety™ (p. 217)
• City Safety™ - function (p. 217)
• City Safety™ - operation (p. 218)

220
07 Driver support

City Safety™ - laser sensor standards for laser product design with WARNING
The City Safety™ function includes a sensor the exception of deviations in accordance
with "Laser Notice No. 50" from If any of these instructions are not followed
which transmits laser light. Contact a qualified then there is a risk of eye injury!
workshop in the event of a fault or if the laser 26 July 2001.
sensor needs servicing - an authorised Volvo • Never look into the laser sensor (which
Radiation data for the laser sensor emits spreading invisible laser radia-
workshop is recommended. It is absolutely The following table specifies the laser sen-
essential to follow the prescribed instructions tion) at a distance of 100 mm or closer
sor's physical data. with magnifying optics such as a mag-
when handling the laser sensor.
nifying glass, microscope, lens or simi-
Maximum pulse energy 2.64 µJ lar optical instruments.
The following two labels relate to the laser
sensor: Maximum average output 45 mW
• Testing, repair, removal, adjustment
and/or replacement of the laser sen-
Pulse duration 33 ns sor's spare parts must only be carried
out by a qualified workshop - we rec-
Divergence (horizontal x verti- 28° × 12° ommend an authorised Volvo work-
cal) shop.
• To avoid exposure to harmful radia-
tion, do not carry out any readjust-
ments or maintenance other than
those specified here.
• The repairer must follow specially
drawn up workshop information for the
laser sensor.
• Do not remove the laser sensor (this
The upper label in the figure describes the includes removing the lenses). A
laser beam's classification: removed laser sensor fulfils laser
class 3B as per standard IEC 60825-1. 07
• Laser radiation - Do not look into the Laser class 3B is not eye-safe and
laser beam with optical instruments - therefore entails a risk of injury.
Class 1M laser product.
• The laser sensor's connector must be
The lower label in the figure describes the unplugged before removal from the
laser beam's physical data: windscreen.
• IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies
with FDA (U.S. Food Administration)
}}

221
07 Driver support
||
• The laser sensor must be fitted onto
the windscreen before the sensor's
connector is plugged in.
• The laser sensor transmits a laser light
when the remote control key is in key
position II (p. 77) even if the engine is
switched off.

Related information
• City Safety™ (p. 217)

07

222
07 Driver support

City Safety™ - symbols and symbols (p. 223) may illuminate in the com- acknowledged by briefly pressing the OK but-
messages bined instrument panel and a text message ton on the direction indicator stalk.
In conjunction with automatic braking by the may be shown. A text message can be
City Safety (p. 217)™ system, one or more

SymbolA Message Meaning/Action


Auto braking by City Safety City Safety™ is braking or has automatically braked.

Windscreen sensors blocked The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.
See manual
• Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.
Read about the laser sensor's limitations.

City Safety Service required City Safety™ is not operational.


• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A The symbols are schematic.

Related information
• City Safety™ (p. 217)
• City Safety™ - function (p. 217)

07

223
07 Driver support

Collision warning system* Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" function • Collision warning system* - limitations
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and may appear in two variants: (p. 229)
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to Level 1 • Collision warning system* - camera sen-
assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- sor limitations (p. 230)
The driver is merely warned21 of occurring
ing with a pedestrian, cyclist or vehicle in obstacles by means of visual and acoustic • Collision warning system* - symbols and
front that are stationary or moving in the same signals - no automatic braking intervenes, the messages (p. 232)
direction. driver must himself brake.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Level 2
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is activated The driver is warned of occurring obstacles
in situations where the driver should have by means of visual and acoustic signals - the
started braking earlier, which is why it cannot car is braked automatically if the driver him-
help the driver in every situation. self does not act within a reasonable time.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is designed IMPORTANT
to be activated as late as possible in order to Maintenance of the internal components of
avoid unnecessary intervention. the "Collision Warning with Auto Brake
and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection"
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
must only be performed at a workshop -
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" can pre- an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
vent a collision or reduce collision speed. mended.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" must not Related information
be used as an excuse for the driver to change • Collision warning system* - function
his/her driving style. If the driver solely relies (p. 225)
on Collision Warning with Auto Brake to do
• Collision warning system* - detection of
07 the braking, there might be a risk of a colli- pedestrians (p. 227)
sion sooner or later.
• Collision warning system* - detection of
Two system levels cyclists (p. 226)
Depending on how the car is equipped, the • Collision warning system* - operation
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and (p. 228)

21 No warning for cyclists with "Level 1".

224 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

Collision warning system* - function 1 - Collision warning If in this situation the driver has not yet
The driver is first warned of a potentially started to take evasive action and the risk of
imminent collision. collision is imminent then the automatic brak-
ing function is deployed - this takes place
The collision warning system can detect
irrespective of whether or not the driver
pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles that are sta-
brakes. Braking then takes place with full
tionary or moving in the same direction in
brake force in order to reduce collision speed,
front of the driver's vehicle.
or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to
If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian, avoid a collision. For cyclists, the warning and
cyclist or a vehicle then the driver's attention full brake intervention may come very late or
is attracted with a flashing red warning signal simultaneously.
(1) and an acoustic signal.

2 - Brake support
Function overview22.
If the risk of collision has increased further
after the collision warning then the brake sup-
Audio-visual warning signal in the event port is activated.
of a collision risk.
This means that the brake system is prepared
Radar sensor23 for rapid braking by applying the brakes
Camera sensor lightly, which may feel like a slight jolt.

Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently
three steps in the following order: quickly then full brake function is imple-
mented.
1. Collision warning
Brake support also reinforces the driver's
2. Brake support23 braking if the system considers that the brak-
3. Auto Brake23 ing is not sufficient to avoid a collision. 07
The collision warning system and City 3 - Auto Brake
Safety™ (p. 217) complement each other.
The automatic brake function is activated
last.

22 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
23 With system Level 2 only.
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 225


07 Driver support
||
WARNING Collision warning system* - detection tours, directly from behind and in the car's cen-
of cyclists tre line.
The collision warning system does not Optimal performance of the system requires
engage in all driving situations or traffic,
weather or road conditions. The collision that the system function that detects a cyclist
warning system does not react to vehicles receives as unambiguous information as pos-
or cyclists driving in another direction to sible about the body and bicycle contours -
the car or to animals. this implies the opportunity to identify the
Warning only activated in the event of a bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper
high risk for collision. This section "Func- and lower body combined with a normal
tion" and the section "Limitations" inform human pattern of movement.
about limitations that the driver must be
If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle
aware of before using the Collision Warn-
ing system with Auto Brake. are not visible to the function's camera then
the system cannot detect a cyclist.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at • For the function to be able to detect a
a vehicle speed exceeding 80 km/h. The function only "sees" cyclists from behind, cyclist, he/she must be an adult and rid-
who are travelling in the same direction. ing an "adult bicycle".
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists do not work in • The function can only detect cyclists
darkness and tunnels - not even when directly from behind and who are travel-
streetlights are lit. ling in the same direction - not at an
The auto-brake function can prevent a col- angle from behind, not from the side.
lision or reduce collision speed. To ensure • The bicycle must be equipped with a
full brake performance, the driver should highly visible and approved24 rearward-
always depress the brake pedal - even facing red reflector, fitted at least 70 cm
when the car auto-brakes.
above the roadway.
Never wait for a collision warning. The • Cyclists travelling on the left or right-hand
07 driver is always responsible that the cor-
edge of the car's imagined/extended side
rect distance and speed are maintained -
even when the collision warning system lines may be detected late or not at all.
with auto-brake is used. • The function's capacity to detect cyclists
Optimal example of what the system interprets at dusk and dawn is limited - just like the
as a cyclist - with clear body and bicycle con- human eye.
Related information
• Collision warning system* (p. 224)
24 The reflector must fulfil the recommendations and conditions of the traffic authority in the market in question.

226 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

• The function's capacity to detect cyclists Collision warning system* - detection • In order for a pedestrian to be detected
is deactivated when driving in darkness of pedestrians he/she must appear full-length and have
and tunnels - even when streetlights are a height of at least 80 cm.
lit. • The camera sensor's ability to see pedes-
• For optimum bicycle detection, the City trians at dusk and dawn is limited - just
Safety™ function must be activated, see like the human eye.
City Safety™ (p. 217). • The camera sensor's capacity to detect
pedestrians is deactivated when driving in
WARNING darkness and tunnels - even when street-
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & lights are lit.
Cyclist Detection is a means of assistance.
The function cannot detect: WARNING
• all cyclists in all situations and does "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
not see partially obscured cyclists, for Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is a
example. Optimal examples of what the system regards as means of assistance. The function cannot
pedestrians with clear body contours. detect all pedestrians in all situations and
• cyclists in clothing that obscures the does not see, for example:
contours of the body or who are Optimal performance of the system requires
approaching from the side. that the system function that detects pedes- • partially obscured pedestrians, people
trians receives as unambiguous information in clothing that hides their body con-
• bicycles that have no rearward-facing tour or pedestrians shorter than
red reflector. as possible about the contours of the body -
80 cm.
this implies the opportunity to identify the
• bicycles loaded with large objects. head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower • pedestrians who are carrying larger
The driver is always responsible that the body combined with a normal human pattern objects.
vehicle is driven properly and with a safety
of movement. The driver is always responsible that the
distance adapted to the speed.
vehicle is driven properly and with a safety
If large parts of the body are not visible to the distance adapted to the speed. 07
Related information function's camera then the system cannot
detect a pedestrian.
• Collision warning system* (p. 224) Related information
• Collision warning system* (p. 224)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 227


07 Driver support

Collision warning system* - operation NOTE Set warning distance


The warning distance regulates the distance
Settings for the collision warning system are The Brake Support and Auto Brake func- at which the visual and acoustic warnings are
made from MY CAR via the centre console tions are always activated - they cannot be
deactivated. deployed.
screen and menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 109). • Search for Warning distance in
Settings for the collision warning system are Collision warning in the menu system
Warning signals On and Off made via the centre console's screen and the MY CAR (p. 109) - and there select Long,
menu system MY CAR, see (p. 109). Normal or Short.
The warning distance determines the sys-
Light and acoustic signals
tem's sensitivity. Warning distance Long pro-
When the collision warning system's light and
vides an earlier warning. First test with Long
acoustic warnings are activated, the warning
and if this setting produces too many warn-
lamp (no. [1] in previous illustration) is tested
ings, which could be perceived as irritating in
each time the engine is started by briefly illu-
certain situations, then change to warning
minating the warning lamp's separate points
distance Normal.
of light.
Only use warning distance Short in excep-
After starting the engine, both light and
tional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.
acoustic signals are switched off:
• Search for Collision warning in Driver NOTE
1. Acoustic and visual warning signal in the event support system in the menu system MY
of a collision risk.25 When the adaptive cruise control is in use
CAR (p. 109) - and there select to
It is possible to select whether the collision uncheck the function. the warning lamp and warning sound will
be used by the cruise control even if the
warning system's acoustic and visual warning Audible signal collision warning system is switched off.
signals should be switched on or off. After starting the engine the warning sound The collision warning system warns the
When starting the engine, the setting that was can be activated/deactivated separately: driver in the event of a risk of a collision,
07 selected when the engine was switched off is but the function cannot shorten driver
• Search for Warning sound in Collision
obtained automatically. warning in the menu system MY CAR reaction time.
(p. 109) - and there select On or Off. In order for the collision warning system to
be effective, always drive with Distance
Following which, the collision warning system
Alert (p. 214) set at time interval 4–5.
is only indicated with a light signal.

25 The illustration is schematic - car model and details may differ.

228 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

NOTE Maintenance Collision warning system* - limitations


The function has certain limitations - for
Even if the warning distance has been set
to Long warnings could be perceived as example, it is not active until approx. 4 km/h.
being late in certain situations, e.g. when
The collision warning system's visual warning
there are large differences in speed or if
vehicles in front brake heavily. signal may be difficult to notice in the event of
strong sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses
are being worn or if the driver is not looking
WARNING straight ahead. The warning sound should
No automatic system can guarantee therefore always be activated.
100 % correct function in all situations. On slippery road surfaces the braking dis-
Therefore, never test Collision Warning tance is extended, which may reduce the
with Auto Brake by driving at people or capacity to avoid a collision. In such situa-
vehicles - this may cause severe damage
Camera and radar sensor26. tions the ABS and ESC (p. 184) systems will
and injury and risk lives.
For the sensors to work correctly, they must provide best possible braking force with
be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be maintained stability.
Checking settings
cleaned regularly with water and car sham-
The settings required can be controlled on NOTE
poo.
the centre console display screen.
The visual warning signal can be temporar-
• Search in the menu system MY CAR NOTE ily disengaged in the event of high passen-
(p. 109) for Collision warning in Driver ger compartment temperature caused by
support system. Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors strong sunlight for example. If this occurs
will reduce their function and may prevent then the warning sound is activated even if
measurement. it is deactivated in the menu system.
• Warnings may not appear if the dis-
Related information tance to the vehicle in front is small or
• Collision warning system* (p. 224) 07
if steering wheel and pedal move-
ments are large, e.g. a very active driv-
ing style.

26 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 229


07 Driver support
||
WARNING Collision Warning with Auto Brake is tempo- Collision warning system* - camera
rarily deactivated with reverse gear engaged. sensor limitations
Warnings and brake interventions could be
implemented late or not at all if the traffic Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not acti- The function uses the car's camera sensor,
situation or external influences mean that vated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which is which has certain limitations.
the radar or camera sensor cannot detect why the system does not intervene in situa-
a pedestrian, a vehicle or a cyclist in front The car’s camera sensor is also used - as
tions where the car is approaching a vehicle
correctly. well as by Collision Warning with Auto Brake
in front very slowly, e.g. when parking.
- by the functions:
The sensor system has a limited range for
In situations where the driver demonstrates
pedestrians and cyclists27 - the system
active, aware driving behaviour, a collision
• Active main beam (p. 88)
can provide effective warnings and brake • Road sign information (p. 188)
interventions for them at vehicle speeds up warning may be postponed slightly in order to
to 50 km/h. For stationary or slow-moving keep unnecessary warnings to a minimum. • Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 233)
vehicles, warnings and brake interventions When Auto Brake has prevented a collision • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 236).
are effective at vehicle speeds up to
70 km/h.
with a stationary object the car remains sta-
tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the NOTE
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving car is braked for a vehicle in front that is mov-
vehicles could be disengaged due to dark- Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
ing, then speed is reduced to the same speed camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist
ness or poor visibility.
as that maintained by the vehicle in front. and dirt.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at On a car with manual gearbox the engine Do not stick or attach anything to the
vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h. stops when Auto Brake has stopped the car, windscreen in front of the camera sensor
unless the driver manages to depress the as this may reduce effectiveness or cause
clutch pedal beforehand. one or more of the systems dependent on
The collision warning system uses the same the camera to stop working.
radar sensors as the adaptive cruise control Related information
(p. 199). • Collision warning system* (p. 224) The camera sensors have limitations similar
If warnings are perceived as being too fre- to the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in
07
quent or disturbing then the warning distance darkness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick
can be reduced. This then leads to the sys- fog for example. Under such conditions the
tem providing a warning at a later stage, functions of camera-dependent systems
which reduces the total number of warnings; could be significantly reduced or temporarily
see Collision warning system - operation disengaged.
(p. 228).

27 For cyclists, the warning and full brake intervention may come very late or simultaneously.

230 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

Strong oncoming light, reflections in the car- The following table presents possible causes Related information
riageway, snow or ice on the road surface, for a message being shown along with the • Collision warning system* (p. 224)
dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings appropriate action.
could also significantly reduce camera sensor
function when it is used to scan the carriage- Cause Action
way and detect pedestrians and other vehi-
cles. The windscreen Clean the wind-
surface in front of screen surface in
The field of vision of the camera sensor is lim-
the camera is dirty front of the camera
ited, which is why pedestrians, cyclists and
or covered with ice from dirt, ice and
vehicles cannot be detected in some situa-
or snow. snow.
tions, or they are detected later than anticipa-
ted. Thick fog, heavy No action. At times
During very high temperatures the camera is rain or snow means the camera does
temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes that the camera not work during
after the engine is started in order to protect does not work suffi- heavy rain or snow-
camera functionality. ciently well. fall.

Fault tracing and action The windscreen Wait. It may take


If the display shows the message surface in front of several minutes for
Windscreen sensors blocked See manual the camera has the camera to
then this means that the camera sensor is been cleaned but measure the visibil-
blocked and cannot detect pedestrians, the message ity.
cyclists, vehicles or road markings in front of remains.
the car. Dirt has appeared Visit a workshop to
At the same time, this means that - besides between the inside have the wind-
Collision Warning with Auto Brake - the fol- of the windscreen screen inside the 07
lowing functions will not have full functionality and the camera. camera cover
either: cleaned - an author-
ised Volvo work-
• Active main beam
shop is recom-
• Driver Alert Control mended.
• Lane Keeping Aid
• Road sign information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 231


07 Driver support

Collision warning system* - symbols


and messages

SymbolA Message Specification


Collision warning sys- Collision warning system switched off.
tem OFF Shown when the engine is started.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.

Collision warning sys- The collision warning system cannot be activated.


tem Unavailable Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.

Auto Braking was acti- Auto Brake has been active.


vated The message clears after one press of the OK button.

Windscreen sensors Camera sensor (p. 230) is temporarily disengaged.


blocked See manual Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
• Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.

Radar blocked See Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.
manual Radar sensor (p. 209) is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy
rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
07
Collision warning Serv- Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
ice required
• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.

Related information
• Collision warning system* (p. 224)

232 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

Driver Alert System* Driver Alert Control (DAC)* driver fatigue, irrespective of whether or not
The Driver Alert System is intended to assist DAC is intended to attract the driver's atten- DAC issues a warning.
drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or tion when he/she starts to drive less consis-
who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are tently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted or NOTE
driving on. starts to fall asleep. The function must not be used to extend a
period of driving. Always plan breaks at
The Driver Alert System consists of different The objective for DAC is to detect slowly
regular intervals, and make sure you are
functions which can either be switched on at deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily well rested.
the same time or individually: intended for major roads.
• Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 234). Limitation
• Lane Keeping Aid (p. 238). In some cases the system may issue a warn-
A switched-on function is set in standby ing despite driving ability not deteriorating, for
mode and is not activated automatically until example:
speed exceeds 65 km/h. • in strong side winds
The function is deactivated again when speed • on rutted road surfaces.
decreases to below 60 km/h. DAC is not intended for city traffic.
The functions use a camera which is depend-
ent on the lane having side markings painted NOTE
on each side.
The camera sensor has certain limitations,
see Collision warning system* - camera
WARNING A camera detects the side markings painted sensor limitations (p. 230).
Driver Alert System does not work in all on the carriageway and compares the section
situations but is designed merely as a sup- of the road with the driver's steering wheel Related information
plementary aid. movements. The driver is alerted if the vehicle • Driver Alert System* (p. 233)
The driver always bears ultimate responsi-
does not follow the carriageway evenly. 07
• Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation
bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven In some cases driving ability is not affected (p. 234)
safely. despite driver fatigue. In which case there
• Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
may not be any warning issued for the driver. messages (p. 235)
For this reason it is always important to stop
Related information and take a break in the event of any signs of • Lane assistance* (p. 236)
• Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 233)
• Lane assistance* (p. 236)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 233


07 Driver support

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation WARNING


Settings are made from the centre console
An alarm should be taken very seriously,
display screen and its menu system. as a sleepy driver is often not aware of
his/her own condition.
On/Off
The Driver Alert function can be set in In the event of an alarm or a feeling of
standby mode via the menu system MY CAR tiredness; stop the car in a safe manner as
soon as possible and rest.
(p. 109):
Studies have shown that it is equally as
• Checked box - function activated. dangerous to drive while tired as it is under
• Unchecked box - the function is deacti- the influence of alcohol.
vated.
Function Related information
Driver Alert is activated when speed exceeds • Driver Alert System* (p. 233)
65 km/h and remains active as long as the • Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 233)
speed is over 60 km/h.
If the vehicle is being driven errati-
cally, the driver is notified by an
acoustic signal plus the text mes-
sage (p. 235) Driver Alert Time for
a break - the linked symbol is illuminated in
the combined instrument panel at the same
time. The warning is repeated after a time if
driving ability does not improve.
The warning symbol can go off:
07 • Press the left stalk switch OK button.

234 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols instrument panel or in the centre console's
and messages screen in different situations.
Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 233) can show Here are some examples:
symbols and text messages in the combined

SymbolA Message Specification


Driver Alert Time for a The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.
break

Windscreen sensors The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.


blocked See manual Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
• Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limita-
tions (p. 230).

Driver Alert system The system is disengaged.


Service required
• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A The symbols are schematic.

Related information
• Driver Alert System* (p. 233) 07
• Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation
(p. 234)
• Lane assistance* (p. 236)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 235


07 Driver support

Lane assistance* WARNING Lane Keeping Aid - function


Lane Keeping Aid is one of the functions in Certain settings can be made for the Lane
LKA is merely a driver's aid and does not
the Driver Alert System - sometimes also engage in all driving situations or traffic, Keeping Aid (Lane Keeping Aid) function.
referred to as LKA (Lane Keeping Aid). weather or road conditions.
Off & On
The function is intended for use on motor- The driver always bears ultimate responsi- Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed
ways and similar major roads in order to bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven range 65-200 km/h on roads with clearly visi-
reduce the risk of the vehicle accidentally safely and that applicable laws and road
ble side lines. The function is temporarily
leaving its own lane in certain situations. traffic regulations are followed.
deactivated on narrow roads with less than
2.6 metres between the lane side lines.
Related information
• Lane Keeping Aid - function (p. 236)
• Lane Keeping Aid - operation (p. 238)
• Lane Keeping Aid - limitations (p. 238)
• Lane Keeping Aid - symbols and mes-
sages (p. 240)
• Driver Alert System* (p. 233)

A camera reads the painted side lines of the


road/lane. If the car is about to cross a side Press the centre console's button to activate
line then Lane Keeping Aid will actively steer or deactivate the function. The button's lamp
the car back into the lane with a slight steer- illuminates when the function is switched on.
07 ing torque in the steering wheel.
Some combinations of the selected equip-
If the car reaches or crosses a side line then ment leave no vacant space for an On/Off
Lane Keeping Aid will also alert the driver with button in the centre console - in which case,
vibration in the steering wheel. the function is instead operated in the car's
menu system MY CAR (p. 109). Here, pro-
ceed as follows:

236 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

• Search for Lane Keeping Aid and then activated, the car is steered back into the Dynamic cornering
select On or Off. lane.
In addition, the following selections can be
Warning with vibration in the steering
made in MY CAR:
wheel
• Warning with vibration in the steering
wheel: Vibration only - On or Off.
• Active steering: Steering assist only- On
or Off.
• Both Warning with vibration in the steer-
ing wheel and Active steering: Full
function - On or Off.

Active steering LKA does not engage in sharp inside curves.


Lane Keeping Aid strives to keep the car
within the side lines for the lane. In certain cases Lane assistance will allow the
car to cross lane lines without engaging
LKA steers and alerts with steering wheel vibra-
active steering or activating a warning. Using
tion28. an adjacent lane for cutting a corner when
there is a clear line of vision is an example of
If the car crosses a side line then Lane Keep- this.
ing Aid will alert the driver with vibration in the
steering wheel29. This occurs regardless of Related information
whether the car is actively steered back by • Lane assistance* (p. 236)
applying a slight steering torque.

07

LKA intervenes and steers away.


If the car approaches the left or right side line
of the lane and the direction indicator is not

28 The figure shows 3 vibrations when the side line is crossed.


29 Steering wheel vibration varies - the longer the time for which the car has crossed the side line, the more pulses there are.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 237


07 Driver support

Lane Keeping Aid - operation Lane Keeping Aid - limitations


Lane Keeping Aid is complemented in the Lane Keeping Aid's camera sensor has limita-
combined instrument panel with intuitive tions in a similar way to the human eye.
graphics in different situations. Here are some
examples: For more information, see Collision warning
system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 230)
NOTE and (p. 229).

LKA is temporarily deactivated for as long


as the direction indicator is switched on.
NOTE
In certain demanding situations Lane
assistance may have difficulty assisting the
driver in the right way - in which case it is
LKA engages on the right side. recommended to deactivate the function.
Lane Keeping Aid intervenes and steers away Examples of such situations may be:
from the side line - this is indicated with: • roadworks
• RED line for the side in question. • winter road conditions
Related information • poor road surface
• Lane assistance* (p. 236) • very sporty driving style
• poor weather with reduced visibility.

Hands on the steering wheel


LKA "sees" the following side lines.
In order for Lane Keeping Aid to operate, the
If Lane Keeping Aid is active and driver must have his/her hands on the steer-
detects/"sees" the side lines, the LKA symbol ing wheel. LKA continually monitors this. If
07 indicates this with WHITE lines. hands are not detected on the steering wheel
then a text message is shown, prompting the
• GREY side line - Lane Keeping Aid does
not see a line on that side of the car. driver to actively steer the car.
If the driver does not follow the request to
begin steering then Lane Keeping Aid goes
into standby mode and will remain in this

238 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

mode until the driver begins to steer the car


again.

Related information
• Lane assistance* (p. 236)

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 239


07 Driver support

Lane Keeping Aid - symbols and combined instrument panel in combination Message examples:
messages with an explanatory message - follow the rec-
In situations where there is no Lane assis- ommendation given if appropriate.
tance function, a symbol may be shown in the

Symbol Message Specification


Windscreen sensors The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
blocked See manual Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
• Clean the windscreen in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limita-
tions (p. 230) and (p. 229).

Lane Keeping Aid Serv- The system is disengaged.


ice required
• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Lane Keeping Aid Inter- LKA has been set to standby mode. The lines of the LKA symbol indicate when the function is active
rupted again.

Related information
• Lane assistance* (p. 236)

07

240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

Park Assist* Related information Park assist syst* - function


Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- • Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors The parking assistance system is automati-
ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on (p. 244) cally activated when the engine is started -
the centre console's display screen indicate • Park assist syst* - function (p. 241) the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If
the distance to the detected obstacle. • Park assist syst* - forward (p. 243) parking assistance is switched off with the
button, the lamp goes out.
Parking assistance sound level can be • Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 244)
adjusted during the ongoing acoustic signal • Park assist syst* - backward (p. 243)
using the centre console's VOL knob or in the
car's menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR
• Park assist camera (p. 245)
(p. 109). • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 249)

Parking assistance is available in two vari-


ants:
• Rear only
• Both front and rear.

NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, the protrusion of the
towbar is included when the function
measures the parking space.

WARNING
• Parking assistance does not relinquish
the driver's own responsibility during 07
parking.
• The sensors have blind spots where
obstacles cannot be detected.
• Be aware of e.g. people and animals
near the car.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241


07 Driver support
||
Marked sectors show which of the four sen- IMPORTANT
sor(s) detected an obstacle. The closer to the
car symbol a selected sector box is, the Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or
shorter the distance between the car and a low barriers may be in the "signal shadow"
and are then temporarily not detected by
detected obstacle. the sensors - the pulsating tone may then
The frequency of the signal increases the unexpectedly stop instead of changing
shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of over to the expected constant tone.
or behind the car. Other sound from the audio The sensors cannot detect high objects,
system is muted automatically. such as projecting loading docks.
When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is • In such situations, pay extra attention
constant and the active sensor's field nearest and manoeuvre/reposition the car par-
the car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is ticularly slowly or stop the current
On/Off for the sensors for parking assistance and
within the distance for the constant tone both parking manoeuvre - there may be a
CTA30.
behind and in front of the car, then the tone high risk of damage to vehicles or
The centre console's display screen shows other objects since the sensors are
sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.
an overview of the relationship between the temporarily unable to function opti-
car and detected obstacle. mally.

Related information
• Park Assist* (p. 241)
• Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 244)
• Park assist syst* - forward (p. 243)
• Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 244)
07 • Park assist syst* - backward (p. 243)
• Park assist camera (p. 245)
• Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 249)
Display screen view - showing an obstacle left
front and right rear.

30 Side warning, CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) (p. 256)

242 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

Park assist syst* - backward NOTE Park assist syst* - forward


Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- Parking assistance is used as an aid to park-
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike
ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genu- ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on
the centre console's display screen indicate ine trailer wiring - parking assistance may the centre console's display screen indicate
the distance to the detected obstacle. need to be switched off manually in order the distance to the detected obstacle.
that the sensors do not react to them.
The parking assistance system is automati-
cally activated when the engine is started -
Related information the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If
• Park Assist* (p. 241) parking assistance is switched off with the
• Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors button, the lamp goes out.
(p. 244)
• Park assist syst* - function (p. 241)
• Park assist syst* - forward (p. 243)
• Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 244)
• Park assist camera (p. 245)
• Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 249)
The distance covered to the rear of the car is
about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for
obstacles behind comes from one of the rear
loudspeakers.
Rear parking assistance is activated when
reverse gear is engaged. The distance covered in front of the car is
about 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for
When reversing with e.g. a trailer on the tow-
obstacles in front comes from one of the front 07
bar, rear parking assistance is switched off
loudspeakers.
automatically - otherwise the sensors would
react to the trailer. Front park assist is active up to
approx. 10 km/h. The lamp in the button is
illuminated in order to indicate that the sys-
tem is activated. When the speed is below
10 km/h the system is reactivated.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 243


07 Driver support
||
IMPORTANT Park assist syst* - fault indication Park assist syst* - cleaning the
Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- sensors
When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember
that these must not obscure the sensors - ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on Parking assistance is used as an aid to park-
the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived the centre console's display screen indicate ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on
as an obstacle. the distance to the detected obstacle. the centre console's display screen indicate
the distance to the detected obstacle.
If the combined instrument panel's
Related information information symbol illuminates with The sensors for parking assistance must be
• Park Assist* (p. 241) constant glow and the text message cleaned regularly to ensure that they work
• Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors Park Assist System Service required is properly. Clean them with water and car
(p. 244) shown then parking assistance is disen- shampoo.
• Park assist syst* - function (p. 241) gaged.
• Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 244)
IMPORTANT
• Park assist syst* - backward (p. 243)
Under some circumstances, the parking
• Park assist camera (p. 245) sensors can give false warning signals due
• Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 249) to external sound sources which emit the
same ultrasound frequencies as those with
which the system works.
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes
and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.

Related information Sensor location, front.


• Park Assist* (p. 241)

07 • Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors


(p. 244)
• Park assist syst* - function (p. 241)
• Park assist syst* - forward (p. 243)
• Park assist syst* - backward (p. 243)
• Park assist camera (p. 245)
• Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 249)

244 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

Park assist camera Function and operation


The parking camera is an auxiliary system and
is activated when the reverse gear is selected.

The camera image is shown on the centre


console's screen.

NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, the protrusion of the
towbar is included when the function
measures the parking space.
Sensor location, rear.
Camera location next to the opening handle.
WARNING
NOTE The camera shows what is behind the car
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors • The parking camera is an aid and can and if something appears from the sides.
will reduce their function and may prevent never replace the responsibilities of
measurement. the driver when reversing. The camera shows a wide area behind the
car and part of the bumper and any towbar.
• The camera has blind spots where
obstacles cannot be detected. Objects on the screen may appear to tilt
Related information
• Park Assist* (p. 241) • Be aware of people and animals near slightly - this is normal.
the car.
• Park assist syst* - function (p. 241)
NOTE
• Park assist syst* - forward (p. 243)
Objects on the display screen may be
• Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 244) closer to the car than they appear to be on
• Park assist syst* - backward (p. 243) the screen. 07
• Park assist camera (p. 245)
• Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 249) If another view is active then the parking
camera system takes over automatically and
its camera image is displayed on the screen.
When reverse gear is selected, two unbroken
lines are shown graphically which illustrate

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 245


07 Driver support
||
where the car's rear wheels will roll with the Park assist lines IMPORTANT
current steering wheel angle - this facilitates
parallel parking, reversing into tight spaces Remember that the display only shows the
and for hitching a trailer. The car's approxi- area behind the car - so pay attention to
the sides and front of the car when turning
mate external dimensions are illustrated by the steering while reversing.
means of dashed lines. The park assist lines
can be deactivated - see section Settings
(p. 247). Boundary lines
If the car is also equipped with Parking assis-
tance sensors * (p. 241) then their information
is shown graphically as coloured areas in
order to illustrate the distance to detected
obstacles, see heading "Cars with reversing
sensors" later in the text. Examples of how the park assist lines can be dis-
played for the driver.
The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after
The lines on the screen are projected as if
reverse gear has been disengaged or until the
they were at ground level behind the car and
car's speed exceeds 10 km/h forward or
are directly related to steering wheel move-
35 km/h backward.
ment, which shows the driver the path the car
Light conditions will then take - also when the car is turning.
Different lines in the system.
The camera image is adjusted automatically
according to prevailing light conditions. NOTE Boundary line, free reversing zone
Because of this, the image may vary slightly
in brightness and quality. Poor light condi-
• When reversing with a trailer which is "Wheel tracks"
not connected electrically to the car,
tions can result in a slightly reduced image the lines on the display show the route The dashed line (1) frames in a zone up to
quality. the car will take - not the trailer. about 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is also
07
the limit of the car's most protruding parts,
NOTE
• The screen shows no lines when a
such as door mirrors and corners - also when
trailer is connected electrically to the
the car is turning.
Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow car's electrical system.
and ice to ensure optimum function. This • The parking camera is deactivated The wide "wheel tracks" (2) between the side
is particularly important in poor light. automatically when towing a trailer if a lines indicate where the wheels will roll and
Volvo genuine trailer cable is used. can extend about 3.2 m back from the
bumper if no obstacle is in the way.

246 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

Cars with reversing sensors* Related information Park assist camera - settings
• Park assist camera - settings (p. 247)
• Park assist camera - limitations (p. 249) Activate switched-off camera
If the camera function is switched off when
• Park Assist* (p. 241) reverse gear is selected, it is activated in the
• Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 249) following way:

Coloured areas (x 4 - one per sensor) show dis-


tance.
If the car is also equipped with Parking assis-
tance (p. 241) the distance is shown with col-
oured fields for each sensor that registers an
obstacle. Main source menu31.
The colour of the areas changes with 1. Give one or two long presses on EXIT to
decreasing distance to the obstacle - from access the main source menu.
light yellow to yellow, via orange to red. 2. Turn to the "Camera" option with TUNE
and press OK/MENU.
Colour / paint Distance (metres) 3. In the following menu: - Turn to the
Light yellow 0,7–1,5 desired camera view with TUNE and
press OK/MENU - the screen shows the 07
Yellow 0,5–0,7 current camera view.

Orange 0,3–0,5

Red 0–0,3

31 See the Sensus Infotainment supplement for more information about the menu system.
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247


07 Driver support
||
Options* 1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is If more options are available, they are in a
Cars with the front camera option have a shown - the screenchanges to a menu loop - press/turn until the desired camera
CAM button on the climate panel. with various options. view is shown.
2. Turn to reach the desired option with
TUNE. Related information
• Park assist camera (p. 245)
3. Highlight the option by pressing OK/
MENU once and go back out with EXIT. • Park assist camera - limitations (p. 249)
• Park Assist* (p. 241)
Towbar
The camera can be used to advantage when
• Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 249)
hitching a trailer. A park assist line for the
towbar's intended "trajectory" toward the
trailer can be shown on the screen - exactly
as for the "wheel tracks".
A choice can be made between showing the
Button location may vary depending on options "wheel tracks" or the towbar's trajectory
for other equipment. - both options cannot be shown simultane-
• Press CAM to activate the camera ously.
- the screenshows the current camera 1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is
view. shown.
To change view between the reversing cam- 2. Turn to reach the Tow bar trajectory
era and front camera: guide line option with TUNE.
• Press CAM or turn TUNE. 3. Highlight the option by pressing OK/
MENU once and go back out with EXIT.
Change setting
Zoom
07 The default setting is that the camera is acti-
If precise manoeuvring is required then the
vated when reverse gear is selected.
camera view can be zoomed in:
The settings for the parking camera can be
changed when the screen shows a camera • Press CAM or turn TUNE - repeated
press/turn changes back to the normal
view:
view.

248 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

Park assist camera - limitations Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* WARNING


The Park Assist Pilot (PAP – Park Assist Pilot)
PAP does not work in all situations but is
NOTE helps the driver to park by first checking designed merely as a supplementary aid.
Bicycle racks or other accessories moun- whether a space is sufficiently large and then
turning the steering wheel and steering the The driver always has the final responsibil-
ted on the back of the car may obscure ity for driving the vehicle in a safe manner
the line of sight of the camera. car into the space.
and for paying attention to the surround-
The combined instrument panel uses sym- ings and other road users approaching or
To bear in mind passing during parking.
bols, graphics and text when elements are to
Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it be executed.
only looks like a relatively small part of the Related information
image is obscured, it could be a relatively • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function
large sector that is hidden from view. Obsta- (p. 250)
cles could thereby go undetected until they • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation
are very close to the car. (p. 250)
• Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations
and snow. (p. 252)
• Clean the camera lens regularly with luke- • Active Park Assist (PAP)* - symbols and
warm water and car shampoo - take care messages (p. 253)
not to scratch the lens.
• Park assist camera (p. 245)
Related information
• Park assist camera (p. 245) The On/Off button is on the centre console.
• Park assist camera - settings (p. 247)
• Park Assist* (p. 241) NOTE
• Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 249) When a towbar is configured with the car's 07
electrical system, the protrusion of the
towbar is included when the function
measures the parking space.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 249


07 Driver support

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation

The combined instrument panel uses sym- The driver is instructed about how PAP works
bols, graphics and text when elements are to by means of simple, clear instructions in the
be executed. combined instrument panel - using both
graphics and text graphics and text message
NOTE (p. 253).
The PAP function measures the space and
turns the steering wheel - the driver's task NOTE
is to follow the combined instrument pan- Remember that certain steering wheel
el's instructions and select the gear positions may obstruct the combined
(reverse/forward), control the speed, brake instrument panel's instructions when you
and stop. Principle for PAP. turn it during the parking manoeuvre.
PAPThe function parks the car using the fol-
PAP can be activated if the following criteria lowing steps: 1 - Searching and checking
are met once the engine has been started: measurements
1. The function searches for a parking space
• The functions ABS32 or ESC33 must not and measures it - during measurement,
intervene when the PAP function is acti- speed must not exceed 30 km/h.
vated - these can be activated in the
2. The car is steered into the space during
event of e.g. steep and slippery surfaces,
reversing.
see the sections on Foot brake (p. 288)
and Stability system ESC (p. 184) for 3. The car is positioned in the space by driv-
more information. ing forward and back.
• Trailers must not be connected to the car. Related information
• The speed must be below 50 km/h. • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 249)
07 • Park assist camera (p. 245)

32 (Anti-lock Braking System) - Anti-lock braking system.


33 (Electronic Stability Control) - Stability system.

250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

The PAP function searches for a parking 2 - Reversing in NOTE


space and checks whether it is big enough.
Proceed as follows: • Keep your hands away from the steer-
ing wheel when the PAP function is
1. Activate PAP by pressing activated.
this button and do not drive
faster than 30 km/h.
• Make sure that the steering wheel is
not hindered in any way and can rotate
freely.
• To achieve optimum results - wait until
the steering wheel is fully turned
2. Keep an eye on the combined instrument before starting to drive backward/
panel and be prepared to stop the car forward.
when the graphics and text message so
request. 3 - Straightening up
During the Reversing step, PAP will steer the
3. Stop the car when the graphics and text car into the parking space. Proceed as fol-
so request. lows:
1. Check that the area behind the car is
NOTE clear, then engage reverse gear.
PAP searches the area for a parking 2. Reverse slowly and carefully without
space, displays instructions and guides touching the steering wheel - and no
the car in on its passenger side. But if faster than approx. 7 km/h.
required the car can also be parked on the
driver's side of the street: 3. Keep an eye on the combined instrument
panel and be prepared to stop the car
• Activate the direction indicator for the when the graphics and text message so
driver's side - the car is then parked request.
on that side of the street instead. 07
When the car has reversed into the parking
space, it must be straightened up and stop-
ped.

}}

251
07 Driver support
||
1. Engage first gear or D position, wait until Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations To bear in mind
the steering wheel has been turned, then The driver should bear in mind that the Park
drive slowly forwards. The PAP sequence is stopped: Assist Pilot is an aid – not an infallible, fully-
2. Stop the car when the graphics and text • if the car is driven too quickly - above automatic function. The driver must therefore
message so request. 7 km/h be prepared to intervene. There are also
3. Engage reverse gear and drive back- details to bear in mind while parking, e.g.:
• if the driver touches the steering wheel
wards slowly until the graphics and text • PAP starts out from the current location
message tell you to stop. • if the ABS34 or ESC35 function is engaged
- e.g. if a wheel loses grip on a slippery of the parked vehicles - if they are inap-
The function is disengaged automatically road surface. propriately parked then the car's tyres
when parking is complete, and the graphics and wheel rims may be damaged against
A text message indicates where the PAP kerbs.
and text message show that parking is com-
sequence was stopped.
plete. It may be necessary for the driver to • PAP is designed for parking on straight
correct the positioning. Only the driver can streets, not sharp curves or bends. For
determine whether the car is properly parked. NOTE this reason, make sure the car is parallel
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors to the parking space when PAP measures
IMPORTANT will reduce their function and may prevent the space.
measurement. • It is not always possible to find parking
The warning distance is shorter when the
sensors are used by PAP compared with spaces on narrow streets since there is
not enough space for manoeuvring. In
when Park Assist uses the sensors. IMPORTANT
such parking situations, it helps the sys-
Under certain circumstances, PAP is tem to drive as close to the side of the
Related information unable to find parking spaces - one reason road as possible where you intend to
• Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 249) for this may be the fact that there is inter- park.
ference with the sensors from external
• Park assist camera (p. 245)
sound sources which emit the same ultra- • Bear in mind that the front of the car may
sound frequencies as those with which the swing out towards oncoming traffic while
system works. being parked.
07
Examples of such sources include horns, • Objects situated higher than the detection
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes areas of the sensors are not included
and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc. when calculations are made for the park-
ing manoeuvre. This may cause PAP to
swing into the parking space too early,

34 (Anti-lock Braking System) - Anti-lock braking system.


35 (Electronic Stability Control) - Stability and traction control system.

252 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

and hence such parking pockets should Maintenance Active Park Assist (PAP)* - symbols
be avoided. and messages
• The driver is responsible for determining
whether the space selected by PAP is The combined instrument panel can show dif-
suitable for parking. ferent combinations of symbols and text with
varying content - sometimes with a self-
• Use approved tyres36 with the correct tyre
explanatory piece of advice on appropriate
pressure - this affects the ability of PAP
action.
to park the car.
• Heavy rain or snow may cause the sys- If a message says that the Park Assist Pilot is
tem to measure the parking space incor- disengaged, contact with an authorised Volvo
rectly. workshop is recommended.
• Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare Related information
wheel are fitted.
The PAP sensors are located in the bumpers37 - • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 249)
• Do not use PAP if loaded objects are pro- 6 front and 4 rear. • Park assist camera (p. 245)
truding from the car.
For the PAP function to work correctly, its
sensors must be cleaned (p. 244) regularly
IMPORTANT with water and car shampoo - these are the
The PAP system's parameters may need same sensors as are used by parking assis-
to be updated when changing to another tance (p. 241).
approved wheel rim size involving changed
tyre circumference. Consult a workshop - Related information
an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 249)
mended.
• Park assist camera (p. 245)

07

36 "Approved tyres" refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory.
37 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 253


07 Driver support

BLIS Overview
BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a
function designed for providing support for
the driver when driving in dense traffic on
roads with several lanes in the same direction.

BLIS is a driver's aid intended to provide a


warning about:
• vehicles in the car's blind spot
• quickly approaching vehicles in the left
and right lanes closest to the car.
Keep this surface clean - also on the left-hand
WARNING side.
Position of the BLIS lamp38.
BLIS is a supplementary aid and does not • To ensure optimal functionality, the areas
Indicator lamp
work in all situations. in front of the sensors must be kept
BLIS is no substitute for a safe driving BLIS symbol clean.
style and the use of rearview and door mir-
rors. Related information
NOTE • BLIS - operation (p. 255)
BLIS can never replace the driver's
responsibility and attention - it is always The lamp illuminates on the side of the car • BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages
the driver's responsibility to change lanes where the system has detected the vehi- (p. 258)
in a safe manner. cle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at
the same time then both lamps illuminate. • CTA* (p. 256)

Maintenance
07 The sensors for the BLIS functions are
located inside the rear wing/bumper on each
corner of the car.

38 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

254 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.


07 Driver support

BLIS - operation • Select On or Off at Settings Car The system is designed to react when:
BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a settings BLIS. • the vehicle is overtaken by other vehicles
function designed for providing support for
the driver when driving in dense traffic on
When BLIS is deactivated/activated the lamp • another vehicle is quickly approaching
in the button goes out/illuminates and the the vehicle.
roads with several lanes in the same direction. combined instrument panel confirms the When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a
Activate/deactivate BLIS change with a text message. The door panel quickly approaching vehicle in zone 2, the
BLIS is activated when the engine is started. indicator lamps flash once upon activation. door panel BLIS lamp illuminates with a con-
This is confirmed by the indicator lamps in To extinguish the message: stant glow. If the driver activates the direction
the door panels flashing once. indicator on the same side as the warning in
• Press the left stalk switch OK button.
this situation then the BLIS lamp will change
or from a constant glow to flashing with a more
• Wait approx. 5 seconds – the message intense light.
extinguishes.
WARNING
When BLIS operates
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is being
reversed.

Limitations
• Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can
reduce functionality and make it impossi-
Button for activating/deactivating.
ble to provide warnings. BLIS cannot
The BLIS function can be deactivated/acti- detect hazards if it is covered.
vated by pressing the BLIS button on the • Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in
centre console. the area of the sensors. 07
Some combinations of the selected equip-
Principle for BLIS: 1. Zone in blind spot. 2. Zone
• BLIS is deactivated when a trailer is con-
ment leave no vacant space for a button in nected to the car's electrical system.
for quickly approaching vehicle.
the centre console - in which case the func-
tion is handled by the car's menu system MY The BLIS function is active at speeds above
CAR39: approx. 10 km/h.

39 For information on the menu system - MY CAR (p. 109).


}}

255
07 Driver support
||
IMPORTANT CTA* • Search for Cross Traffic Alert under
The BLIS function CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) is BLIS and uncheck - the CTA function is
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' then deactivated.
components or repainting the bumpers a driver aid intended to warn about crossing
must only be performed by a workshop - traffic when the car is reversing. CTA is a sup- However, the BLIS function remains activated
an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- plement to BLIS (p. 254). after the CTA has been deactivated.
mended.
Activate/deactivate CTA WARNING
CTA is activated when the engine is started.
Related information This is confirmed by the indicator lamps in CTA is a supplementary aid and does not
• BLIS (p. 254) the door panels flashing once. work in all situations.
• BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages CTA is no substitute for a safe driving style
(p. 258) and the use of rearview and door mirrors.
CTA can never replace the driver's respon-
sibility and attention - it is always the driv-
er's responsibility to reverse in a safe man-
ner.

When CTA operates

On/Off for parking assistance and CTA sensors.


In cars equipped with Parking assistance
(p. 241), the CTA function can be deacti-
07 vated/activated separately with the parking
assistance On/Off button.